Alvarion Technologies IF-57 IP Broadband Wireless Access System User Manual SystemManual

Alvarion Ltd. IP Broadband Wireless Access System SystemManual

User Manual

BreezeACCESS V System ManualCat. No. 213283
© 2002 by Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form without the written permission of the copyright owner.Trade NamesBreezeACCESS, BreezeNET, BreezeLINK, BreezeVIEW, BreezeMANAGE, BreezeCONFIG and BreezeWIZARD are trade names of Alvarion Ltd. Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.Statement of ConditionsThe information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Alvarion shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it.WarrantyIn the following warranty text, “the Company” shall mean:Alvarion Ltd., for products located outside the USA.Alvarion Inc., for products located in the USA.This BreezeACCESS product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of purchase. During this warranty period the Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products that prove to be defective.For warranty service or repair, the product must be returned to a service facility designated by the Company. Authorization to return products must be obtained prior to shipment. The buyer shall pay all shipping charges to the Company and the Company shall pay shipping charges to return the product to the buyer.The Company warrants that the firmware designed by it for use with the unit will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on the unit. The Company does not warrant that the operation of the unit or firmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.Limitations of WarrantyThe foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the buyer, buyer supplied interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance. No other warranty is expressed or implied. The Company specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose.Alvarion shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not limited to, loss of profits or revenues, loss of use or damage to any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute products, facilities or services, downtime costs or claims resulting from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture, sale, handling, service, repair, maintenance or use of the products. In no event shall the company’s liability exceed the purchase price denoted on the invoice.
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionElectronic Emission NoticeThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:This device may not cause harmful interference.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.FCC Radio Frequency Interference StatementThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.FCC Radiation Hazard WarningTo comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in section 1.1307, a minimum separation distance of 2 m (79 inches) is required between the antenna and all persons:Information to UserAny changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.Safety ConsiderationsFor the following safety considerations, “Instrument” means the BreezeACCESS units’ components and their cables.CautionTo avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.BS-GU Lithium BatteryCaution: Danger of battery explosion if incorrectly replaced or disposed of. Replace only with the same or equivilant type battery, as recommended by the manufactuer. Dispose of used batterys according to manufactuer’s instructions.Line VoltageBefore connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument.Power CordUse only the power cord supplied with the unit.RadioThe instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated.
Important Notice iiiOutdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and GroundingBe sure that the outdoor unit, the antenna and the supporting structure are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Verify that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes.
iv BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionImportant NoticeThis user's manual is applicable to BreezeACCESS units using software version 4.1 or later and is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:!This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting explicitly and properly authorized users of BreezeACCESS.!No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical, without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.!The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only. The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice.!The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that agreement.!Information in this document is subject to change without notice.!Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.!Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.!The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer for the sale of the product described herein.NOTE:The currently released BreezeACCESS V product line does not include certain products and features which are described in this manual. These include the following:! SU-E Subscriber units with a connector for an external antenna! Subscriber Units with voice support! BreezeCONFIG! BreezeMANAGE
Table of ContentsSystem Manual Book 1:System DescriptionIntroduction .............................................................1-1Introducing BreezeACCESS .....................................................1-2System Components .............................................................2-1Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment) ...............2-2Base Station Equipment ...........................................................2-4Networking Equipment ..............................................................2-8Management Systems ...............................................................2-9Specifications ..........................................................3-1System Specifications ...............................................................3-2Physical Specifications .............................................................3-6
System Manual Book 2:InstallationIF-Based Equipment ................................................................1-1Packing Lists ..............................................................................1-2Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations ..................1-5Installing the Outdoor Unit .......................................................1-7Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Unit ...........................1-12Installing Modular Base Station Equipment ..........................1-14Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System .................1-20
System Manual Book 3:CommissioningSettingBasic Parameters ....................................................1-1Accessing the Monitor Program ..............................................1-2Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units ...................................................1-5Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS Units ...........................1-10Optimizing the Wireless Link .....................................................2-1RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration (Subscriber Units) ......................................................................2-2Aligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit .............2-3ConnectingExternal AlarmDevices ....................................................................3-1Connecting External Devices to the GU-BS AL IN and/or AL OUT Connectors ...............................3-2Verifying Proper Operation .....................................................4-1Verifying Connectivity ...............................................................4-2LED Indicators ...........................................................................4-4
System Manual Book 4:Operations and AdministrationAccessing the Monitor Program ......................................................1-1Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector ............................................................1-2Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet ........................1-4Operating the Monitor Program ...............................................1-6Menus and Parameters .......................................................2-1Main Menu ..................................................................................2-2Info Screens Menu .....................................................................2-3Unit Control Menu ......................................................................2-6Basic Configuration Menu ......................................................2-10Site Survey Menu .....................................................................2-12Advanced Configuration Menu ...............................................2-21Configuration Download/Upload .....................................................3-1
Table of Contents ixSystem Manual:AppendicesAppendix A:Software Version Loading Procedure ..................................................A-1General ...................................................................................... A-1Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type: F .............. A-3Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type: S .............. A-5Appendix B:Supported MIBsand Traps .................................................................B-1BreezeACCESS System Object Identifiers ............................. B-2brzAccessMIB ........................................................................... B-4brzPhoneMIB (applicable to SU with voice only) ................ B-33Supported Traps ..................................................................... B-39Appendix C:RSSI to dBm Conversion Table .....................................................C-1Appendix D:Parameters List .......................................................D-1Unit Control Parameters .......................................................... D-1Site Survey Parameters ........................................................... D-2IP Parameters ........................................................................... D-2Air Interface Parameters .......................................................... D-3Network Management Parameters .......................................... D-5Bridge Parameters ................................................................... D-6Performance Parameters ......................................................... D-7Service Parameters .................................................................. D-8Security Parameters ................................................................. D-8Voice Parameters ..................................................................... D-9Dialing Parameters ................................................................. D-10Telephony Signals .................................................................. D-12Hopping Parameters .............................................................. D-14Index .........................................................................I-1
xBreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
BreezeACCESS V System Manual Book 1:System Description
System DescriptionTable of ContentsIntroduction .............................................................1-1Introducing BreezeACCESS .....................................................1-2System Components .............................................................2-1Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment) ...............2-2SU-A/E Units with an Outdoor Radio Unit and Antenna .....2-2Base Station Equipment ...........................................................2-4Modular Base Station Equipment .......................................2-4AU-E-NI Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access Unit ...................2-7Networking Equipment ..............................................................2-8Management Systems ...............................................................2-9BreezeMANAGE ................................................................2-9BreezeCONFIG ................................................................2-10Specifications ..........................................................3-1System Specifications ...............................................................3-2Radio and Modem ..............................................................3-2Data Communication ..........................................................3-3Voice/Fax (Subscriber Units with voice support) ................3-3Telephony (Subscriber Units with voice support) ...............3-3IF Indoor – Outdoor Communication (SU-A/E, AU-E-NI, AU-E-BS) .............................................3-4Configuration and Management .........................................3-4GU-RA GPS Radio .............................................................3-4GU-RA to BS-GU Communication .....................................3-5Environmental ....................................................................3-5Standards Compliance, General ........................................3-5Physical Specifications .............................................................3-6SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ......................................................3-6AU-E-NI Stand-Alone Access Unit .....................................3-7Modular Base Station Equipment .......................................3-8
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Chapter 1IntroductionThis chapter introduces the BreezeACCESS system, its components and its functions.About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Introducing BreezeACCESSBreezeACCESS IP Broadband Wireless Access system is an IP based access system that supports wireless data and voice services, employing wireless packet-switched data technology to support high-speed IP services, including fast access to the Internet and Virtual Private Networks.BreezeACCESS users are provided with a network connection that is always on, supporting access to the Internet and other IP services at data rates of up to 3 Mbps. BreezeACCESS can also support high quality telephony using the ITU-T H.323 industry standard for Voice over IP communications. The system is designed for cellular-like deployment, allowing systems of various sizes and structures to be constructed. A system may include any number of cells, each containing several Access Units, to better cover densely populated areas. The BreezeACCESS system allows the Maximum (data burst) Information Rate (MIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR) for both uplink and downlink to be defined separately for each subscriber. This enables a variety of Class of Service (CoS) packages, bandwidth allocations and traffic-shaping schemes. In addition, the system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802.1Q, enabling secure operation and Virtual Private Network (VPN) services as well as allowing tele-workers or remote offices to conveniently access their enterprise networks. The system also supports Layer 2 traffic prioritization according to IEEE 802.1p and ToS based Layer 3 traffic prioritization according to RFC791.BreezeACCESS V operates in the 5.7 GHz ISM band in Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode. It employs wireless packet data switching technology, utilizing Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FH-SS) radios. BreezeACCESS V units are available with one of the following options:!US Option – Supports the standard ISM Frequency Hopping sequence.!INT (International) Option – Allows hopping frequency selection.A BreezeACCESS-based system consists of the following:!Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) – BreezeACCESS Subscriber Units.!Base Station Equipment (BSE) – BreezeACCESS Access Units and supporting equipment.!Networking Equipment – Standard Routers and/or Gateways/Gatekeepers supporting connections to the Internet and/or the PSTN or private telephony network. !Management Systems – SNMP based Management, Billing and Customer Care, and other Operations Support Systems.
Chapter 2SystemComponentsThis chapter describes the BreezeACCESS system components. It includes the following sections:! Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment)‚ page 2-2, describes BreezeACCESS equipment installed at the customer’s premises.!Base Station Equipment‚ page 2-4, describes the equipment used in BreezeACCESS Base Stations.!Networking Equipment‚ page 2-8, describes how BreezeACCESS Base Station units are connected to one another and to other equipment in a network environment.! Management Systems‚ page 2-9, introduces the management features built into the BreezeACCESS system and describes the use of various standard and proprietary management systems.About This Chapter
2-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment)The BreezeACCESS Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at the customer premises provides data only or data and telephone connections. The data connection is a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interface while the voice connection (in units that support voice) is a standard RJ 11 Plain Old Telephone (POTS) interface. The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient platform for high rate Internet and Intranet services, providing subscribers with fast access to IP based services at a burst data rate of up to 3 Mbps. The use of packet switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is practically always on, allowing for immediate access to services.SU-A/E Units with an Outdoor Radio Unit and Antenna SU-A and SU-E series Subscriber Units are comprised of an indoor unit (SU-NI) and an outdoor unit. !In the SU-A series, the outdoor unit (SU-RA) contains the radio module and an integral flat antenna. !In the SU-E series, the outdoor unit (SU-RE) contains the radio module and an RF connector for an external antenna. The indoor SU-NI unit connects to the user’s equipment and is powered from the mains via its SU-PS power supply unit. The SU-NI is connected to the outdoor unit via a 50-ohm coaxial Intermediate Frequency (IF) cable. This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals between the indoor and the outdoor units and also serves for transferring power (12 VDC), management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.NOTE:The currently released BreezeACCESS V product line does not support SU-E units or units with voice support.
System Components 2-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualFigure 2-1: BreezeACCESS SU-A/E Outdoor and Indoor UnitsThe following products are available:Data-only Units: Data and Voice Units: X=A: The outdoor radio unit includes an integral high gain flat antennaX=E: The outdoor radio unit has a connector for an external antennaSU-X-1D-5.7 The unit supports one Ethernet device.SU-X-8D-5.7 The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices (eight MAC addresses). SU-X-BD-5.7 The unit provides bridge functionality and can support up to a full LAN.SU-X-1D1V-5.7 The unit supports one Ethernet device and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set (POTS).SU-X-8D1V-5.7 The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices (eight MAC addresses) and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set (POTS).SU-X-BD1V-5.7 The unit provides bridge functionality and can support a full LAN. It also has an interface for a standard analog telephone (POTS).
2-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Base Station EquipmentThe BreezeACCESS Access Units (AU) installed at the base station site provide all the functionality necessary to communicate with the remote Subscriber Units as well as to connect to the backbone of the service provider. Each AU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interface.There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures: !Modular Base Station Equipment!Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access UnitModular Base Station Equipment The Base Station equipment is based on the BS-SH 3U chassis, which is suitable for installation in 19” racks. The chassis contains one or two power supply modules, up to six active Access Unit Network Interface (BS-AU) modules and an optional BS-GU GPS and Alarms module. Two different types of power supply modules are available: the BS-PS which is powered from a –48 VDC power source, and the BS-PS-AC, powered from the 110/230 VAC mains. The optional use of two power supply modules is for fail-safe operation through power supply redundancy. Each BS-AU module, together with its outdoor radio unit comprises an AU-E-BS Access Unit that serves a single sector. The AU-RE outdoor unit contains the radio module and a RF connector for a separate external antenna.The BS-AU modules connect to the network through standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interfaces. A coaxial Intermediate Frequency (IF) cable connects the indoor module to the outdoor unit. This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals, power (12 VDC) and management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.
System Components 2-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualFigure 2-2: BreezeACCESS Base Station Module and Outdoor UnitGU-A-BS GPS and Alarms SystemThe optional GU-A-BS system can be used to synchronize the frequency hopping mechanisms of collocated AU-E-BS BreezeACCESS units (where such synchronization is permitted by local regulations) as well as to provide alarm management.The GU-A-BS system is comprised of two units:!An outdoor GPS Receiver and Antenna unit, the GU-RA.!An indoor GPS and Alarms module, the BS-GU.
2-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Figure 2-3: BreezeACCESS GU-A-BS System ComponentsThe BreezeACCESS BS-GU module is designed to be inserted into the BS-SH 19” base station chassis to provide hopping synchronization signals to the BS-AU Access Unit modules. The card uses timing signals derived from signals received from the GU-RA GPS antenna. These signals, generated by the GPS global satellites network, allow accurate synchronization of systems located in different locations. Any number of base stations can be synchronized, guaranteeing that all AUs (Access Units) hop in unison from frequency to frequency. In addition, the GPS signal insures that all units begin their pre-defined hopping sequence at the same time. The BS-GU module is connected to the GU-RA GPS antenna via a cable that carries power from the module to the antenna, timing signals from the antenna to the module and management signals between the two units.The BS-GU also provides synchronization signals to other BS-GU modules by daisy-chaining any number of modules, allowing a single GU-RA GPS antenna to synchronize multiple AUs in several collocated BS-SH chassis.When a GU-RA GPS antenna is not connected to the module (or if the connected GPS antenna is not functioning properly), the BS-GU module provides self-generated synchronization signals to all AUs.
System Components 2-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualDaisy-chained BS-GU modules use the synchronization signals generated by the first unit in the chain (the Master unit).The BS-GU module also supports the management of alarm inputs and outputs. The module receives Alarms In indications from other BreezeACCESS modules in the base station shelf (internal alarms) and external alarms from other devices via the AL IN connector. Alarms Out management allows activation of external devices upon occurrence of user-defined events, using relays via the AL OUT connector.AU-E-NI Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access UnitThe AU-E-NI is a Standalone Access Unit that is very similar to the AU-E-BS unit, the only difference being that the indoor unit, the AU-NI, is a Standalone desktop or wall-mountable unit rather than a 19” module. Figure 2-4: BreezeACCESS AU-NI UnitThe AU-RE outdoor unit is identical to that of the AU-E-BS line. The AU-NI indoor unit is powered from the mains (100-250 VAC) through an external power transformer and connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interface. A coaxial Intermediate Frequency (IF) cable connects between the AU-NI indoor unit and the outdoor unit. This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals, power (12 VDC) and management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.
2-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Networking EquipmentThe base station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment. For improved security, the 10BaseT ports of the AU modules are connected directly to a multi-port router. This router is connected by any means of point-to-point link to the backbone. In cases where security is less important and cost is the main concern, the Access Units can be connected to an Ethernet switch and then to a single port router.The point-to-point link from the base station to the backbone may be wired or wireless links. The data to the Internet is routed to the Internet backbone through standard routers. The voice traffic is routed via standard Gateways/Gatekeepers to the PSTN.
System Components 2-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManagement SystemsThe end-to-end IP based architecture of the system allows full management of all components from any point in the system. BreezeACCESS components can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agents that implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters. The same SNMP management tools can also be used for management of other system components including Switches, Routers, Gateways/Gatekeepers and transmission equipment.The Ethernet WAN can also be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Admission) tools.BreezeMANAGE Alvarion’s SNMP-based BreezeMANAGE network management application provides a powerful tool for configuring, controlling, monitoring and effectively managing BreezeACCESS networks from a single, central network management station. BreezeMANAGE, together with the powerful tools available through its use under leading network management platforms, provides numerous benefits to operators of BreezeACCESS networks.BreezeMANAGE system requirements are:!BreezeMANAGE for SNMPc: Castle Rock Computing SNMPc version 5.0.7d or higher (excluding 5.0.8), running under Windows 98/2000/NT.!BreezeMANAGE for HP-OV under UNIX: HP OpenView version 5.0.1 or higher running on a UNIX machine under Solaris Version 2.5 or higher.!BreezeMANAGE for HP-OV under NT: HP OpenView version 5.0.1 or higher running on a PC under Windows NT version 4.0 or higher with service pack 5.!Client: Any system supported by the network management platform such as HP-UX Xterm (HP-OV) or Windows 95/98/2000/NT. !Database: Any database supported by the network management platform such as Oracle, Sybase, Informix or Ingress.NOTE:The currently released version of BreezeMANAGE (SW version 4.0.6) does not support BreezeACCESS V units.
2-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01BreezeCONFIGThe BreezeCONFIG ACCESS configuration utility can also be used to manage BreezeACCESS system components. It is an SNMP-based application that provides a consistent view of the network and the system administrator can use it to control a large number of units from a single location. BreezeCONFIG has the following system requirements:!Windows 95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP!128 MB RAM recommended, 64 MB MinimumSome of the features BreezeCONFIG supports are:!Verifying units’ status and current configuration!Changing the configuration of a selected unit!Simultaneously changing the configuration of multiple units!Viewing traffic statistics and performance data!Monitoring traps!Performing firmware upgrade to a single or multiple units NOTES:The BreezeCONFIG utility can be downloaded from the Alvarion Web site: www.alvarion.com.The currently released version of BreezeCONFIG (SW version 4.0.50) does not support BreezeACCESS V units.
Chapter 3SpecificationsThis chapter lists the technical specifications of BreezeACCESS and includes the following sections:!System Specifications‚ page 3-2, outlines the technical specifications of the BreezeACCESS system.!Physical Specifications‚ page 3-6, lists the physical and electical specifications for different types of BreezeACCESS units.About This Chapter
3-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01System SpecificationsRadio and Modem Frequency INT Mode: 5.725-5.875 GHzUS Mode: 5.725-5.710 GHzOperation Mode Time Division DuplexRadio Access Method FH-CDMAStandard Compliance FCC Part 15.247, ETS 301 253 Channel Bandwidth 1 MHzCentral Frequency Resolution 1 MHzAntenna SU-RA 20dBi, 14o horizontal x 11 o vertical, vertical polarization, EN 302 085, Class TS 2 compliantSU-RE, AU-RE N-Type connector, 50 ohmThe tested antenna types are as follows:Sector Antenna: 17 dBi, 60o Horizontal x 7o Vertical, vertical polarization, EN 302 085Subscriber Antenna:20 dBi, 14o Horizontal x 11o Vertical, vertical polarization, EN 302 085 Class TS2 CompliantOutput Power (at antenna port) 26 dBm typical Maximum Input Power (at antenna port) -20 dBmGross Bit Rate 1, 2, 3 MbpsReceive Nominal Sensitivity (at antenna port, BER 10E-6)1 Mbps 2 Mbps 3 Mbps-85 dBm -78 dBm -70 dBmModulation GFSK modulation, with 2, 4, 8 modulation states (1, 2, 3 bits / symbol).Symbol rate 1 Msymbol/sec.
Specifications 3-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualData CommunicationVoice/Fax (Subscriber Units with voice support)Telephony (Subscriber Units with voice support)Standard Compliance IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CDVLAN support Based on IEEE 802.1QLayer-2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802.1pLayer-3 Traffic Prioritization ToS according to RFC791MIR (Maximum Information Rate) and CIR (Committed Information Rate)Programmable for each user, separately for uplink and downlink. Range: 0 – 2200 Kbps, 1 Kbps resolution.Standard Compliance ITU-T H.323 Ver. 2 VoIP standardCompression G.711 (A-Law and µ-Law) - 64 Kbps (transparent)G.723.1 - 6.3 KbpsG.729 - 8 Kbps (G.729, G.729 with Annex A and/or Annex B)Silence Compression G.723.1 - Voice Activity Detection (VAD), G.729 - Annex BEcho Cancellation ITU-T G.168 and G.131Fax Transmission According to T.38 ProtocolCall Progress Tones Selectable per country standard or user definableLine Type Loop StartOn-hook Voltage -48 VRinger Voltage Min. 50 V r.m.s. unbalancedRinger Frequency Selectable: 17, 20, 25, 50 Hz REN Max. 2Off-hook DC current 30mAOff-hook impedance 600 ohm or complexMaximum input level +3 dBmCable length Max. 300 m, 26 AWG
3-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01IF Indoor – Outdoor Communication (SU-A/E, AU-E-NI, AU-E-BS)Configuration and Management GU-RA GPS RadioIF Frequency 440 MHzIF Cable Impedance 50 ohmMaximum IF Cable Attenuation 15 dBMaximum IF Cable DC Resistance 1.5 ohmManagement Options a. Via the MON port, using terminal emulation with the built-in monitor programb. Telnet, using the monitor programc. TFTP, using the Configuration upload/download utilityd. SNMPRemote Management Access From Wired LAN, Wireless LinkManagement Access Protection a. Multilevel passwordb. Configuration of remote access direction (from Ethernet only, from wireless link only or from both sides)c. Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stationsSNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client. MIB II, Bridge MIB, Private BreezeACCESS MIBSecurity a. Association protocol – ESSIDb. RC4 WEP option (encryption of the authentication process)c. VLAN according to IEEE 802.1Q d. IP level filtering for user addresses or protocolse. Access direction and IP address filtering for managementAllocation of IP Parameters Configurable or automatic (DHCP client)Software Upgrade Via TFTPGeneral L1 frequency, C/A code (SPS) continuous tracking receiverUpdate Rate 1 Hz
Specifications 3-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualGU-RA to BS-GU CommunicationEnvironmentalStandards Compliance, GeneralPhysical interface RS 422Cable Type EIA RS 422 3 x 2 x 26AWG + 1 x 2 x 24 AWG FTP Shielded. 3 x 26 AWG twisted pairs for RS 422 communication and 1x 24 AWG pair for power supplyCable Impedance 100 +/- 15 ohm @ 1 MHz (RS 422 pairs)DC Resistance RS 422 pairs: 145 ohm/kmPower supply pair: 94 ohm/kmMaximum Cable Length 120 metersOperating Temperature Outdoor Units -400C to 550C (GU-RA: -400C to 850C)Indoor equipment 00C to 400COperating Humidity Outdoor Units 5%-95% non-condensing, weather protectedIndoor equipment 5%-95% non-condensingType StandardEMC FCC part 15 EN 300 385Safety UL 1950, EN 60950Environmental ETS 300 019 part 2-3 class 3.2E for indoor unitsETS 300 019 part 2-4 class 4.1E for outdoor unitsRadio FCC part 15.247, ETSI ETS 301 253
3-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Physical SpecificationsSU-A/E Subscriber Unit ConnectorsElectricalMechanicalUnit Connector DescriptionSU-NI IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDs. Cable connection to a PC: straightTEL (units with voice support) RJ 11 jack (POTS)DC-12 V DC phone jack for the SU-PS power supplyMON RS 232, 3-pin low profile jackSU-RE IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedSU-RA IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedUnit DetailsGeneral Power consumption: 25 WSU-NI External power supplyAC input power: 100-240 Vr.m.s., 47-63 HzDC power output: 12 V, 2.5 ASU-RA, SU-RE 12 VDC from the SU-NI unit over the IF cableUnit Structure Dimensions WeightGeneral An indoor SU-NI unit with an external SU-PS power supply unit and an outdoor SU-RE or SU-RA radio unitSU-NI Metal box, desktop or wall mountable 15 x 8.7 x 3.7 cm 0.34 kg.SU-PS Desktop unit, 1.5 m DC cable 12 x 6 x 3.6 cm 0.28 kg.SU-RE Metal box, pole or wall mountable 30.8 x 12 x 4.7 cm 1.58 kg.SU-RA Metal box plus an integral antenna in plastic enclosure, pole or wall mountable 30.6 x 30.6 x 7.2 cm(30.6 x 12 x 4.7 cm + 30.6 x 30.6 x 2.5 cm)2.5 kg.
Specifications 3-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualAU-E-NI Stand-Alone Access UnitConnectorsElectricalMechanicalUnit Connector DescriptionAU-NI IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDsCable connection to a PC: crossedDC-12 V DC phone jack for the AU-PS power supplyMON RS 232, 3-pin low profile jackAU-RE IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedUnit DetailsGeneral Power consumption: 25 WAU-NI External power supplyAC input power: 100-240 Vr.m.s., 47-63 HzDC power output: 12 V, 2.5 AAU-RE 12 VDC from the AU-NI unit over the IF cableUnit Structure Dimensions WeightGeneral An indoor AU-NI unit with an external AU-PS power supply unit and an outdoor AU-RE or AU-RA radio unitAU-NI Metal box, desktop or wall mountable 15 x 8.7 x 3.7 cm 0.34 kgAU-PS Desktop unit, 1.5 m DC cable 12 x 6 x 3.6 cm 0.28 kgAU-RE Metal box, poll or wall mountable 30.6 x 12 x 4.7 cm 1.58 kg
3-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01Modular Base Station EquipmentConnectorsUnit Connector DescriptionAU-E-BS AU-BS IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC: crossedMON RS 232, 3-pin low profile jackAU-RE IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedBS-PS -48V 3 pin DC power plugBS-PS-AC AC IN 3 pin AC power plugBS-GU ETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDsCable connection to a PC: straightSYNC IN 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003 (mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar);4 contact closure alarm indicatorsSYNC OUT 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003 (mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar);3 non-latching relays, rating = 24 V (DC or AC) @ 1 A max.AL IN 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003 (mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar)AL OUT 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003 (mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar)GU-RA 12-pin round
Specifications 3-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualModular Base Station Equipment - ElectricalMechanicalUnit DetailsGeneral 250 W for a fully equipped chassis (1 PS, 6 AU, 1 GU)BS-PS DC power input: -48 V, 5.2 A max.DC power output: 12 V; 5 VBS-PS-AC AC power input: 85-256 VAC, 47-65 Hz,DC power output: 12 V; 5 V; 3.3 V (not used)BS-AU 5 VDC, 12 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back planeAU-RE 12 VDC from the BS-AU over the IF cableAU-BS (BS-AU module plus AU-RE outdoor unit)Power consumption: 25 WBS-GU 5 VDC, 12 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back planeGU-RA 12 VDC from the BS-GU over the connecting cableUnit Structure Dimensions WeightBS-SH 19” rack (3U) or desktop installation 13 x 48.2 x 25.6 cm 4.76 kgBS-PS DC power supply module 12.9 x 7 x 25.3 cm 0.7 kgBS-PS-AC AC power supply module 12.9 x 7 x 25.3 cm 1.2 kgBS-AU Indoor module of the AU-BS access unit 12.9 x 3.5 x 25.5 cm 0.22 kgAU-RE Metal box, pole or wall mountable 30.6 x 12 x 4.7 cm 1.58 kgBS-GU Indoor module of the GU-A-BS 12.9 x 3.5 x 23 cm 0.22 kgGU-RA A plastic tubular enclosure, pole mountable 15.5 x 12.7 cm 0.363 kg
3-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System DescriptionManual Revision: 1.01
BreezeACCESS V System Manual Book 2:Installation
InstallationTable of ContentsIF-Based Equipment ................................................................1-1Packing Lists ..............................................................................1-2SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ......................................................1-2Modular Base Station Equipment .......................................1-2Standalone AU-E-NI Access Unit .......................................1-3Other Items Required for Installation ..................................1-3Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations ..................1-5AU-RE ................................................................................1-5SU-RA and SU-RE .............................................................1-5IF Cable ..............................................................................1-5Indoor Equipment ...............................................................1-6Installing the Outdoor Unit .......................................................1-7The Outdoor Unit Bottom Panel .........................................1-7Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit .........................................1-9Connecting the Antenna Cable (SU-RE and AU-RE) .......1-11Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Unit ...........................1-12Installing the SU-NI/AU-NI Unit ........................................1-13Installing Modular Base Station Equipment ..........................1-14BS-SH Slot Assignments ..................................................1-14The BS-PS .......................................................................1-14The BS-PS-AC .................................................................1-15The BS-AU .......................................................................1-17BS-SH Chassis and Modules Installation Procedure .......1-18Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System .................1-20BS-GU Front Panel ..........................................................1-20Installing the GU-RA GPS Antenna ..................................1-22Installing the BS-GU module ............................................1-23Daisy-chaining Two or More BS-GU Modules ..................1-23
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Chapter 1IF-BasedEquipmentThis chapter describes the basic installation of BreezeACCESS IF-based equipment, including SU-A/E subscriber units, modular base station equipment and stand-alone AU-E-NI access units. It includes the following sections:!Packing Lists‚ page 1-2, lists the equipment that is packed with each BreezeACCESS IF-based unit.!Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations‚ page 1-5, gives tips and guidence for locating BreezeACCESS equipment for optimum performance.!Installing the Outdoor Unit‚ page 1-7, explains how to install the outdoor elements of BreezeACCESS systems.!Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Unit‚ page 1-12, outlines the installation procedures for SU-NI and AU-NI units.!Installing Modular Base Station Equipment‚ page 1-14, outlines the installation procedures for modular base station equipment.!Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System‚ page 1-20, outlines the installation procedures for a GPS and Alarms system.About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Packing ListsSU-A/E Subscriber Unit!SU-NI Indoor unit !Outdoor unit:SU-RA with integral antenna–Or–SU-RE with a connector to an external antenna (not included)!SU-PS power supply with a mains power cord!Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit!Wall mounting kit for the SU-NI unitModular Base Station EquipmentBS-SH Base Station Chassis!BS-SH chassis (with blank panels)!Rubber legs for optional desktop installation!BS-PS DC power supply!DC power cable!Documentation CDBS-SH-AC Base Station Chassis!BS-SH-AC Chassis (with blank panels)!Rubber legs for optional desktop installation!BS-PS-AC AC Power Supply!AC Power Cable!Documentation CDAU-E-BS Access Units (up to six per chassis)! AU-RE with a connector to an external antenna (not included)!Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit!BS-AU Network Interface module!Monitor cableBS-PS DC Power Supply (one or two per chassis)!BS-PS power supply module!DC power cable
IF Based Equipment 1-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualBS-PS-AC Power Supply (one or two per chassis)!BS-PS-AC power supply module!AC power cableGU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System!BS-GU module!GU-RA GPS antenna and receiver!1” threaded mounting pole for the GU-RA GPS antenna!Antenna Mounting kitStandalone AU-E-NI Access Unit! AU-RE with a connector to an external antenna (not included)!Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit!AU-NI indoor unit!Wall mounting kit for the AU-NI unit!AU-PS power supply with a mains power cord!Monitor cable!Documentation CDOther Items Required for Installation !IF cable* (available from Alvarion in different lengths)!Grounding cable with an appropriate termination!Antenna* and RF cable* according to specific installation conditions for units with external separate antennas!Ethernet cable to connect the equipment to the Ethernet outlet (see Table 1-1‚ page 1-4)!Telephone cord for connecting a Subscriber Unit with voice support to a telephone set (RJ 11 connector at the Subscriber Unit side)!GPS cable (30, 60 or 120 meter – supplied separately according to order)*!SYNC cable* – for daisy-chaining GPS modules (if necessary)!Alarms-In and Alarms-Out cables* for the GPS module (if necessary)!Installation tools and materialsFor local configuration of parameters: !A portable PC with Terminal Emulation software and Monitor cable* (Monitor cable is supplied with Access Units) –Or–!A portable PC equipped with an Ethernet card and with Telnet software, and an Ethernet cable (see Table 1-1‚ page 1-4)
1-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available as options from Alvarion.NOTE:The BS-GU does not have an external Monitor port and it should be configured via the Ethernet port using Telnet.Table 1-1: Required type of Ethernet cableUnit Type Connection to a PC Connection to a hubSubscriber Unit Straight CrossedAccess Units Crossed StraightGPS module Straight Crossed
IF Based Equipment 1-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualGuidelines for Selection of Equipment LocationsSelect appropriate locations for the outdoor unit and for the indoor equipment using the following guidelines:!The outdoor unit can be pole or wall mounted. Its location should allow easy access to the unit for installation and testing.!The higher the antenna, the better the achievable link quality.Units with an external antenna should be installed as near as possible to the antenna.AU-REThe external antenna connected to the AU-RE unit, should be installed where it provides coverage of all Subscriber Terminals in the area it is intended to serve. The higher the antenna, the better coverage it can provide.SU-RA and SU-REThe SU-RA outdoor unit with its integrated antenna, or the external antenna connected to the SU-RE unit, should be installed where it has a direct line of sight with the Base Station antenna. The antenna (integrated on the front side of the SU-RA outdoor unit or external if using SU-RE) should be directed towards the Base Station. The unit should be installed in a way that allows optimal alignment towards the Base Station. IF CableThe outdoor unit is connected to the indoor unit by means of an IF cable carrying signaling, control signals and power. The IF frequency is NOTE:Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities.Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas.NOTE:The distance between any two antennas should be greater than 40 cm.
1-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01440 MHz. The maximum allowed attenuation of the IF cable connecting the outdoor unit to the indoor unit is 15 dB at 440 MHz, and the maximum allowed DC resistance (the sum of the DC resistance of the inner and outer conductors) is 1.5 ohm. This allows for cable length of up to 30 m when using the standard RG 58 cable.If longer cables are required, a cable with lower attenuation and/or DC resistance should be used. Table 1-2‚ page 1-6 provides details regarding some popular cables such as the RG 58 and RG 213. If the spectral environment is polluted with noise in the 440 MHz band, it is recommended to use a higher quality double-shielded cable such as the LMR 200, LMR 240 and LMR 400 (manufactured by Times Communications).Indoor EquipmentThe Indoor unit should be installed as close as possible to the point where the IF cable enters the building. The location of the indoor unit should also take into account the need to connect it to a power mains outlet and to the CPE.Table 1-2: IF CablesCable Type RG 58 RG 213 LMR 200 LMR 240 LMR 400Maximum cable length (m) 30 100 45 65 150NOTE:The system complies with the ETS 300 385 standard and is protected against secondary lightning strikes when its outdoor unit is properly grounded according to the applicable country-specific industry standards for protection of structures against lightning. The system complies with EN 61000-4-5, test level 3 (2kV).
IF Based Equipment 1-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualInstalling the Outdoor Unit The Outdoor Unit Bottom Panel The SU-RA outdoor unit includes the radio and an integral high-gain flat antenna located on the front of the unit. The SU-RE and AU-RE outdoor radio units have an RF connector for connection to an external antenna.Figure 1-1SU-RA/RE Bottom PanelNOTE:SU-RE and AU-RE units must be installed by a professional installer only.Table 1-3: SU-RA/RE LEDsName Description FunctionalityETH Ethernet activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet LANOff – No activity on the Ethernet LANWLNK Wireless link activity Blinking – Receiving packet from the wireless linkOff – No reception of packets from the wireless linkALARM Alarm indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the locking process of any of the synthesizersOff – Normal operation
1-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Figure 1-2: AU-RE Bottom PanelTable 1-4: SU-RA/RE Bar Display DescriptionLED Description FunctionalityYellow LED Power On – power is presentOff – power is not received from the indoor unit8 Green LEDs Received signal strength indication Received RF signal level indication in 4 dB resolution, starting from –91 dBmRed LED High RF signal level Received signal level is –40 dBm or higher
IF Based Equipment 1-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 1-5: AU-RE LEDsPole Mounting the Outdoor UnitThe outdoor unit can be secured to the pole using one of the following options:!Special brackets and open-ended screws (supplied with each unit). There are two pairs of screw holes on the back of the unit, allowing use of the special brackets with various pole widths.!U-bolts – size A (inner installation holes, up to 2" pole).!U-bolt – size B (outside installation holes, up to 3" pole).!Metal bands (9/16" wide, minimum 12" long).Figure 1-3‚ page 1-10 shows the locations of the U-bolt holes, band grooves and screw holes on the rear side of the outdoor unit.Figure 1-4‚ page 1-10 illustrates the method of installing an outdoor unit on a pole, using the brackets and open-ended screws.Name Description FunctionalityETH Ethernet activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet LANOff – No activity on the Ethernet LAN12V IN Power On – 12 VDC power is supplied to the unitOff – 12 VDC power is not availableALARM Alarm indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the locking process of any of the synthesizersOff – Normal operationNOTE:Make sure to install the unit with the bottom panel (the panel with the IF connector) facing downward.
1-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Figure 1-3: Holes/Grooves/Screw HolesFigure 1-4: 3" Pole Mounting Installation Using the Special BracketsNOTE:When inserting the open-ended screws, make sure to insert them with the grooves pointing outwards; these grooves are intended to allow fastening of the screws with a screwdriver.
IF Based Equipment 1-11BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualConnecting the Antenna Cable (SU-RE and AU-RE)Connect an RF cable between the ANT connector (located on the top panel of the unit) and the antenna.Connecting the Ground and IF CablesThe ground terminal (marked ) and the IF cable connector (marked IF) are located on the bottom panel of the unit.1. Connect one end of the ground cable to the ground terminal and tighten the ground screw firmly. Connect the other end of the ground cable to a protective ground connection.2. Connect the coaxial cable to the IF connector. Verify that the length of the IF cable is sufficient and that it can easily reach the indoor unit. NOTE:Make sure to switch off the power at the indoor unit prior to connecting/disconnecting the IF cable to/from the outdoor unit.
1-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor UnitFigure 1-5: SU-NI with Voice Support Rear PanelFigure 1-6: SU-NI/AU-NI Front PanelNOTE:The rear panel pictured above in Figure 1-5 is a SU-NI with voice support; AU-NI units and SU-NI units that belong to Subscriber Units without voice support are identical, except that they have no TEL port.
IF Based Equipment 1-13BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe SU-NI/AU-NI provides the following interfaces:!An Ethernet connector (marked ETH) for connecting the unit to the network. See Table 1-1‚ page 1-4 for information on the required type of Ethernet cable.!An IF connector for connecting the unit to an outdoor unit. !A DC-12V connector for the power supply.!A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes.!A TEL connector (Sunscriber Units with voice support only) for connecting a regular telephone.Installing the SU-NI/AU-NI Unit1. Place the unit in an appropriate location on a shelf or a table. The unit can be wall mounted using the installation materials provided with the unit. Use a 6 mm (1/4") drill and the supplied template plate for easy and accurate marking of the holes. 2. Connect the power supply DC power cord to the DC In jack (marked DC-12V) located on the rear panel of the unit (shown in Figure 1-5‚ page 1-12).3. Connect the IF cable to the IF connector (marked IF). The other side of the IF cable should already be connected to the outdoor unit.4. Connect the mains power cord to the power supply unit. Connect the mains power plug to a mains power outlet.5. Verify that the Power LED (marked PWR) located on the front panel of the unit, as shown in Figure 1-6‚ page 1-12, is lit.Table 1-6: SU-NI/AU-NI LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power Supply On – After successful power up, indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit. Off – Power off or failure to supply 12 VDC to the outdoor unit.WLNK Wireless Link Activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the wireless mediaOff – No reception of packets from the wireless media
1-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Installing Modular Base Station EquipmentBS-SH Slot AssignmentsThe base station chassis has ten slots.Figure 1-7: BS-SH Chassis Slot AssignmentsThe two wide slots on both sides of the shelf accommodate the BS-PS or BS-PS-AC power supply modules. The shelf is designed to support power supply redundancy through the use of two power supply modules. If a single power supply is used, it can be inserted in any of the two available slots. When using two power supply modules, both modules must be the same type (either both BS-PS or both BS-PS-AC).The remaining eight slots can accommodate up to six active BS-AU modules. Two extra slots are for an optional BS-GU GPS module and/or for future use. Active BS-AU modules can be installed in any of the eight slots. Unused slots should be covered by blank panels.The BS-PSThe BS-PS provides power to all the modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. The BS-PS front panel is shown in Figure 1-8‚ page 1-15.
IF Based Equipment 1-15BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualFigure 1-8: BS-PS Front PanelThe BS-PS provides a power input connector (marked -48V) for connecting the -48VDC power source to the module. The color codes of the cable wires are:Black -48 VDCRed + (Return)The power switch turns the mains power to the power supply ON and OFF.The BS-PS-ACThe BS-PS-AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. The BS-PS-AC front panel is shown in Figure 1-9‚ page 1-16.Table 1-7: BS-PS LEDs FunctionalityName DescriptionON -48 VDC is available and power supply is on5V The 5V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one BS-AU module is inserted)12V The 12V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one AU-RA/RE unit is connected)
1-16 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Figure 1-9: BS-PS-AC Front PanelThe BS-PS-AC provides a power input connector (marked AC IN) for connecting the AC power cable to the mains. The ON/OFF power switch controls the connection of the mains power to an AC to DC converter.Table 1-8: BS-PS-AC LEDs FunctionalityName Description3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3V power supply module is OK (3.3V power supply is not used by current BreezeACCESS modules)5V Green LED. Indicates that the 5V power supply module is OK12V Green LED. Indicates that the 12V power supply module is OK OVER TEMP Red LED. Indicates an Over Temperature condition in the power supply moduleNOTE:If the Over Temp indication stays on for more than 10 seconds, the power supply module will shut itself offautomatically to prevent damage.
IF Based Equipment 1-17BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe BS-AUFigure 1-10: BS-AU Front PanelWARNING:If two power supply modules are used in the same chassis for redundancy, both power supplies must be of the same type. Do not use a mix of AC and DC power supply modules in the same chassis.
1-18 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01The BS-AU provides the following interfaces:!An Ethernet connector (marked ETH) for connecting the BS-AU to the network. A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the module to a hub, router or switch.!An IF connector for connecting the BS-AU to an outdoor unit (AU-RE). !A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes.The switch on the BS-AU front panel controls the supply of 12 VDC power to the outdoor unit via the IF cable. The momentary RESET position of this switch is for resetting the outdoor unit. In the OFF position, power is not supplied to the outdoor unit, even when the BS-AU unit is still on.BS-SH Chassis and Modules Installation Procedure1. Install the BS-SH chassis in a 19" cabinet (or place on an appropriate shelf/table). When mounting the BS-SH chassis on a desktop, screw on the rubber legs shipped with the unit. To prevent over-heating, leave a free space of at least 1 U between the upper/lower covers of the chassis and other units.2. Connect a ground cable between the ground terminal (located on the back panel of the BS-SH chassis) and a grounding point (or to the rack when appropriate).Table 1-9: BS-AU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power supply 12 VDC On – After successful power up, indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit. Off – Power off or DC/DC converter failure (12 VDC not supplied to the outdoor unit)WLNK Wireless link activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the wireless mediaOff – No reception of packets from the wireless mediaALRM Alarm On – Loss of hopping synchronization (in Slave mode)MASTER Master unit On – The unit is configured as Master
IF Based Equipment 1-19BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual3. Carefully insert the BS-PS or BS-PS-AC Power Supply and the BS-AU modules into their intended slots and push firmly until they are securely locked. Before inserting the modules, verify that the switches of all BS-AU modules are in the OFF position. Close the captive screws attached to each module. Place blank covers over all the unused slots.4. Connect the IF cable(s) to the connector(s) marked IF located on the front panel(s) of the BS-AU module(s) as shown in Figure 1-10‚ page 1-17. The other side of the IF cable should already be connected to the outdoor unit.5. If a BS-PS DC power supply is used, connect the DC power cable to the –48 VDC In jack (marked –48V) located on the front panel of the BS-PS power supply. If a redundant power supply module is installed, connect a power cable to it as well. Connect the power cable(s) to the –48 VDC power source and the black wire to the -48 VDC contact of the power source. Connect the red wire to the + (Return) contact. Connect the shield to the ground.6. If a BS-PS-AC AC power supply is used, connect the AC power cable to the AC jack (marked AC IN) located on the front panel of the BS-PS-AC power supply. If a redundant power supply module is installed, connect a power cable to that unit as well. Connect the power cable(s) to the AC mains.7. Switch the BS-PS or BS-PS-AC power supplies to ON. Verify that all the power indicator LEDs on the front panel are on. If you are using a BS-PS-AC power supply module, verify that the OVERTEMP alarm indicator is off.8. Configure the basic parameters in all BS-AU modules as described in Book 3: Commissioning. Set the switches on the front panel of all BS-AU modules in the chassis to ON only after all the basic parameters have been configured properly. This is to avoid transmitting at undesired frequencies.NOTE:Disconnect the IF cable from the BS-AU module before inserting or removing it to/from the BS-SH chassis.
1-20 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms SystemBS-GU Front PanelFigure 1-11: BS-GU Front Panel
IF Based Equipment 1-21BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 1-10: BS-GU ConnectorsConnector Name FunctionalitySYNC IN Receives signals from the GPS antenna unit.If more than one collocated BS-GU module uses a single GPS antenna, this connector is used by a “Slave” unit to receive synchronization signals from the “Master” unit.SYNC OUT Sends synchronization signals to “Slave” BS-GU modules.AL IN Four connections to receive indications from external devices.AL OUT Three relay outputs to external devices.ETH Ethernet 10BaseT interface. Use a straight cable to connect directly to a PC. Use a crossed cable to connect to a hub. Table 1-11: Front Panel LEDs and SwitchesLED Name FunctionalityPWR (green) On – Power supply functioning properly.Off – Power supply not functioning properly.OK (green) On – Proper signals are being received from the GPS antenna.Off – The GPS antenna is not connected or it is not functioning properly.A1 (red) On – Alarm In 1 (external) is activated.A2 (red) On – Alarm In 2 (external) is activated.A3 (red) On – Alarm In 3 (external) is activated.A4 (red) On – Alarm In 4 (external) is activated.A5, A6 (red) Reserved for future use.Ethernet Activity -Ethernet Connector embedded LED (green)On – Receiving traffic on the Ethernet port.Off – No activity on the Ethernet port.Ethernet Integrity -Ethernet Connector Embedded LED (orange)On – Unit is connected to an Ethernet segment.Off – Unit is not connected to an Ethernet segment.Reset Press this button with a paper clip or similar object in order to reset the unit.
1-22 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01Installing the GU-RA GPS Antenna1. Screw the GPS antenna firmly to the special 1” threaded pole.2. Use the mounting kit supplied with the unit (or any other suitable means) to secure the GPS antenna pole to an existing pole (e.g. any pole used for mounting base station antennas or the outdoor units of the BreezeACCESS Access Units). Choose the location to ensure an obstacle-free line of sight from the GPS antenna to the sky, extending at least 30 degrees in all directions.Figure 1-12: GPS Installation3. Secure the GPS cable to the mounting pole, leaving a free length of cable (with the 12-pin round connector at the end) sufficient for connecting to the antenna module. 4. Connect the 12-pin round connector to the GPS antenna.5. Route the cable to the location intended for installation of the BS-GU module.WARNING:The cable is very heavy and connecting it to the antenna without first securing it to the pole may damage the connector.
IF Based Equipment 1-23BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualInstalling the BS-GU moduleInserting the BS-GU Module and Connecting It to the Antenna1. Carefully insert the BS-GU module into any of the free suitable slots in the BS-SH chassis and push firmly until it is securely locked. Close the captive screws attached to the module. 2. Connect the 9-pin micro D-Type connector of the GPS cable to the SYNC IN connector (the top-left connector) of the BS-GU module. Daisy-chaining Two or More BS-GU ModulesIf two or more BS-GU modules are installed in different collocated BS-SH chassis, use a synchronization cable (supplied separately) to connect the SYNC OUT connector of the first (Master) module to the SYNC IN connector of the second module. The SYNC OUT of this second module may be connected to the SYNC IN of a third module, and so on. NOTE:Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities.Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas.NOTE:When adding the BS-GU to an active base station, it is recommended to start by reconfiguring the AU previously defined as Master to Slave, then immediately inserting and configuring the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter in the BS-GU module. Otherwise both the Master AU and the BS-GU will send conflicting synchronization signals to the Slave AUs. During this process, connectivity with the Subscriber Units will be interrupted. It is recommended to perform the upgrade during a planned downtime or at a time of minimal traffic. Properly configuring the value of the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter in the BS-GU is mandatory for proper operation of the base station. All other parameters of the BS-GU module may be configured later as they do not impact the operation of the system.WARNING:Deactivate the power to the BS-GU unit before connecting it to a GPS antenna. Switch on the BS-GU only after the GPS antenna has been connected.
1-24 BreezeACCESS 4.0 InstallationManual Revision: 1.01
BreezeACCESS VSystem Manual Book 3:Commissioning
Using This GuideAfter completing the installation process as described in Book 2: Installation, the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates properly and to provide wireless connectivity. Once the basic parameters have been configured properly, additional parameters can be remotely configured via either the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP management.For further information concerning any of the parameters described in this section, consult Book 4: Operation and Administration.
CommissioningTable of ContentsSettingBasic Parameters ....................................................1-1Accessing the Monitor Program ..............................................1-2Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector ....................................................1-2Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet .....................1-4Operating the Monitor Program ..........................................1-4Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units ...................................................1-5Introduction .........................................................................1-5Configuring IP Parameters .................................................1-5Configuring ESSID Parameters ..........................................1-6Configuring Frequency Hopping Parameters ....................1-7Configuring VLAN Parameters ...........................................1-8Configuring Best AU Parameters (SU Only) ......................1-8Configuring Preferred AU Mac Address (SU Only) ............1-8Configuring Security Parameters .......................................1-8Resetting the Unit ...............................................................1-9Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS Units ...........................1-10Introduction .......................................................................1-10Configuring IP Parameters ...............................................1-10Configuring Hopping Parameters .....................................1-11Configuring VLAN Parameters .........................................1-11Resetting the Unit .............................................................1-11Optimizing the Wireless Link .....................................................2-1RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration (Subscriber Units) ......................................................................2-2Aligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit .............2-3ConnectingExternal AlarmDevices ....................................................................3-1Connecting External Devices to the GU-BS AL IN and/or AL OUT Connectors ...............................3-2
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Chapter 1SettingBasic ParametersThis chapter explains how to configure the basic parameters of the BreezeACCESS system and includes the following section:!Accessing the Monitor Program‚ page 1-2, explains how to access your BreezeACCESS units for configuration.!Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units‚ page 1-5, outlines the basic configuration process for BreezeACCESS AU and SUs.!Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS Units‚ page 1-10, outlines the basic configuration process for BreezeACCESS BS-GU units.About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01Accessing the Monitor ProgramAccessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector1. Use the monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the unit to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC. The COM port connector on the monitor cable is a 9-pin D-type plug.2. Run a terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal™).3. Set the communication parameters as follows:4. Press Enter. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access level according to your authorized access level. You will be requested to enter your password. After entering the correct password, press Enter.Table 1-1‚ page 1-3 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels.Baud Rate 9600Data Bits 8Stop Bits 1Parity NoneFlow Control Xon/XoffConnector Connected COM port
Setting Basic Parameters 1-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 1-1: Default PasswordsFigure 1-1: Main Menu – Administrator Access Rights (SU and AU)The appearance of the Main Menu varies in accordance with the set access level.!For users with Read Only access rights, only the Info Screens option is displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Unit Control, Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus.!For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items (Info Screens, Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey) are displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Advanced Configuration menu. !For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu will be displayed. These users can access all the menu items.Access Rights PasswordRead Only publicInstaller userAdministrator privateNOTE:Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords) from either the monitor port or via Telnet, the monitor program will be blocked for five minutes. To access the monitor program during this time, the unit must be reset (via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power).BreezeACCESS/AU-BSOfficial Release Version – 4.0.40Release Date: Thu Dec 20 20:21:36 2001Main Menu=====================1 – Info Screens2 – Unit Control3 – Basic Configuration4 – Site Survey5 – Advanced ConfigurationX - Exit>>>
1-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet1. Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the unit. See the table below to determine the type of cable. Configure the PC’s IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit (the default IP Address is 10.0.0.1). Run the Telnet application.Table 1-2: Required Type of Ethernet Cable2. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access level according to your authorized access rights. You will be requested to enter your password. After entering the correct password press Enter. Default passwords are listed in Table 1-1‚ page 1-3.3. The Main Menu appears. Proceed as you would after connecting via the MON port.Operating the Monitor Program1. Type an option number to open/activate the option. You may need to press Enter in some cases.2. Press Esc to exit a menu or option.3. You can log-out and exit the monitor program from the Main Menu by selecting X (exit). (To get to the Main Menu from anywhere in the program, press the Esc key several times). You can also exit the monitor program from anywhere in the program by simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and X keys. 4. Reset the unit after making configuration changes for the new values to take effect.NOTE:The Main Menu of the GU-BS (GPS and Alarms module) does not include the Basic Configuration option.Unit Type Connection to a PC Connection to a hubSubscriber Units Straight CrossedAccess Units Crossed StraightGPS module Straight CrossedNOTE:The program will terminate automatically after a given period of inactivity specified by the Log-Out Timer parameter.
Setting Basic Parameters 1-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualConfiguring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber UnitsIntroductionThe Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters that are necessary for the initial installation and operation of BreezeACCESS units. Once the unit is properly installed and operational, other parameters can be configured using the monitor program or via either the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP management. Refer to Book 4: Operations and Administration for detailed information on the applicable parameters.Configuring IP Parameters1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select the DHCP Client menu 2. From the DHCP Client menu, select the DHCP Options menu and choose the required option: Disable, DHCP Only or Automatic.!If you have selected Disable, configure the following parameters:"From the Basic Configuration menu, select IP Address. The IP Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required IP address."From the Basic Configuration menu, select Subnet Mask. The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears. Enter the required subnet mask."From the Basic Configuration menu, select Default Gateway Address. The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required default gateway address.!If you have selected DHCP Only, select Access to DHCP. The Access to DHCP menu opens. Select the required access option: From Ethernet Port Only, From Wireless Port Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports. !If you have selected Automatic, configure the following parameters:
1-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01"From the Basic Configuration menu, select Access to DHCP. The Access to DHCP menu opens. Select the required access option: From Ethernet Port Only, From Wireless Port Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports."From the Basic Configuration menu, select IP Address. The IP Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required IP address."From the Basic Configuration menu, select Subnet Mask. The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears. Enter the required subnet mask."From the Basic Configuration menu, select Default Gateway Address. The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required default gateway address.Configuring ESSID Parameters1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select ESSID. The ESSID configuration screen appears. Enter the required ESSID.If you are configuring an Access unit, configure the following parameters in addition to the ESSID.2. From the Basic Configuration menu select Operator ESSID Parameters. From the Operator ESSID Parameters menu, select Operator ESSID Option.The Operator ESSID Option configuration screen appears. Select Enable or Disable as required. If Enable is selected, select Operator ESSID from the Operator ESSID Parameters menu. Enter the required Operator ESSIDIf Disable is selected, the Operator ESSID does not need to be configured. NOTE:The ESSID and the Operator ESSID are case sensitive.
Setting Basic Parameters 1-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualConfiguring Frequency Hopping Parameters 1. In units where Hopping Band selection is available, select Hopping Band from the Basic Configuration menu. The Hopping Band configuration screen appears. Enter the required hopping band option: ISM US FCC, ISM International or Flexible Hopping Definition.!If the selection in the Hopping Band configuration screen was Flexible Hopping Definition, or if Hopping Band is not available, proceed to Step 2.!If the selection in the Hopping Band configuration screen was other than Flexible Hopping Definition and you are configuring an AU-BS unit, proceed to Step 5. Otherwise, continue to the next parameter.2. From the Flexible Hopping Definition menu, use the Add Frequencies and Remove Frequencies options to define the frequencies to be used. You can use the Erase All option to delete all entries from the existing list. Refer to Appendix C for a complete list of the standard MMDS channels and frequencies. 3. From the Flexible Hopping Definition menu, select Scrambling Definition. The Scrambling Definition menu opens.4. From the Scrambling Definition menu select Scrambling Mode. The Scrambling Mode configuration screen appear. Select the required mode: Standard Scrambling, Manual Scrambling or Enhanced Scrambling.!If Standard Scrambling is selected, there is no need to define other scrambling parameters.!If Manual Scrambling is selected, select Manual Sequence Definition in the Scrambling Definition menu. The Manual Sequence Definition configuration screen appears. Enter the required sequence.!If Enhanced Scrambling was selected, there is no need to define other scrambling parameters unless you are configuring an Access unit. If you are configuring an Access unit, select Spanning Factor in the Scrambling Definition menu. The Spanning Factor configuration screen appears. Enter the required value for the Spanning Factor.5. If you are configuring an AU-BS Modular Access Unit, the Hopping Sync and Hopping Shift parameters must be configured.!Select Hopping Sync from the Basic Configuration menu. The Hopping Sync configuration screen appears. Select the required hopping sync option: Idle, Slave or Master.
1-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01!Select Hopping Shift from the Basic Configuration menu. The Hopping Shift configuration screen appears. Select the required hopping shift value.Configuring VLAN Parameters1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select VLAN Support.The VLAN Support menu appears.2. From the VLAN Support menu, select VLAN Link Type. The VLAN Link Type configuration screen appears. Select the required option: Hybrid, Access or Trunk Link.3. From the VLAN Support menu, select VLAN ID – Management (VLAN ID – Voice and Management in subscriber units with voice support). The VLAN ID – Management (or VLAN ID – Voice and Management) configuration screen appears. Select the required VLAN ID value (enter 65535 for no VLAN).Configuring Best AU Parameters (SU Only)1. From the Basic Configuration menu select Best AU Parameters.The Best AU Parameters menu opens.2. From the Best AU Parameters menu, select Best AU Support. Select the required option, Enable or Disable.Configuring Preferred AU Mac Address (SU Only)!If Best AU Support is enabled, you may elect to set the Preferred AU MAC Address parameter by selecting Preferred AU MAC Address from the Best AU Parameters menu and entering the MAC address of the preferred AU.Configuring Security Parameters1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Security Parameters. The Security Parameters menu opens2. If the required authentication algorithm is Open System, select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu.The Authentication Algorithm menu opens. Select Open System.3. If the required algorithm is Shared Key, do the following:
Setting Basic Parameters 1-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!Define at least one of the four WEP Keys by selecting one of them from the Security Parameters menu and entering the required key.!Select Default Key ID from the Security Parameters menu and enter the number of a defined WEP key.!Select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu.The Authentication Algorithm menu opens. Select Shared Key.Resetting the UnitAfter completing the process of configuring the basic parameters, the unit should be reset so that all new settings are applied.1. From the Main Menu, select Unit Control.The Unit Control menu opens.2. From the Unit Control menu, select Reset Unit. The Reset Unit configuration screen opens. Type 1 to reset the unit so that new configuration settings are applied.NOTE:The Shared Key option cannot be selected until at least one WEP Key and the appropriate Default Key ID are configured.
1-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS UnitsIntroductionThis section describes all the parameters that are necessary for the initial installation and operation of GU-RA units. Once the unit is properly installed and operational, other parameters can be configured using the monitor program via Telnet or SNMP management. Since all the parameters needed are found in the Advanced Configuration menu, Admistrator level access is required in order to configure a GU-RA unit.Refer to Book 4: Operation and Administration for detailed information on the applicable parameters.Configuring IP Parameters1. From the Advanced Configuration menu, select DHCP Client.The DHCP Client menu appears. 2. From the DHCP Client menu, select DHCP Options The DHCP Options menu opens. Choose the required option: Disable, DHCP Only or Automatic.If DHCP Only is selected, proceed to the next parameter.If Disable or Automatic is selected, continue to step 3.3. From the Basic Configuration menu, select IP Address. The IP Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required IP address.4. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Subnet Mask. The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears. Enter the required subnet mask.5. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Default Gateway Address. The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required default gateway address.NOTE:The GU-RA does not have an external MON port, and therefore must be configured using Telnet.
Setting Basic Parameters 1-11BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualConfiguring Hopping Parameters1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Hopping Parameters.The Hopping Parameters menu opens.2. From the Hopping Parameters menu, select Number of Hopping Frequencies. The Number of Hopping Frequencies configuration screen appears. Enter the number of hopping frequencies used by the system.3. From the Hopping Parameters menu, select Synchronization Signal Source.The Synchronization Signal Source configuration screen appears. Select the required option: GPS Antenna or Internal or Local (from other GU).Configuring VLAN Parameters1. From the Advanced Configuration menu, select Bridge Parameters.The Bridge Parameters menu appears.2. From the Bridge Parameters menu, select VLAN Support.The VLAN Support menu appears.3. From the VLAN Support menu, select VLAN ID – Management.The VLAN ID – Management configuration screen appears. Select the required VLAN ID value (enter 65535 for no VLAN).Resetting the UnitAfter completing the process of configuring the basic parameters, the unit should be reset so that all new settings are applied.1. From the Main Menu, select Unit Control.The Unit Control menu opens.2. From the Unit Control menu, select Reset Unit. The Reset Unit configuration screen opens. Type 1 to reset the unit so that new configuration settings are applied.NOTE:You may determine the number of hopping frequencies being used by the system by viewing Number of Hopping Frequencies in the Show Basic Configuration screen of any configured AU.
1-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 2Optimizingthe Wireless LinkThis chapter explains how to optimize the performance of the wireless link of BreezeACCESS Subscriber Units and includes the following sections:!RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration (Subscriber Units)‚ page 2-2, explains how to read the RSSI measurement and to configure the optimum value for the Maximum Data Rate parameter.!Aligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit‚ page 2-3, give tips and instructions for aligning the antenna of the SU-A/E for optimum performance.About This Chapter
2-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration (Subscriber Units)The Continuous Link Quality Display test allows a continuously updated display of the average Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI). As the test measures only the desired signal of properly received frames, it is a good indication of the quality of the received signal. 1. From the Main Menu, select Site Survey. The Site Survey menu opens. From the Site Survey menu, select Continuous Link Quality Display.On the screen you will see a continuously updated display of RSSI measurements. The display can be in either dBm units or RSSI units. To change the display option, select RSSI Display in the Site Survey menu and choose the required option. To stop the Continuous Link Quality Display test, press the Esc key.2. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Maximum Data Rate.The Maximum Data Rate configuration screen appears.3. Configure the value of the Maximum Data Rate parameter according to the following table, taking into account a 3 dB safety margin above the applicable sensitivity level4. Reset the unit for the new configuration to become effective.NOTE:The RSSI bar display is meaningful only after the Access Unit you wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters in the Subscriber Unit were properly configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the Access Unit. As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames, its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit.Maximum Data Rate 3 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 MbpsSU-A/E RSSI>-67dBm -75dBm<RSSI<-67dBm RSSI<-75dBm
Optimizing the Wireless Link 2-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualAligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit1. Verify that the outdoor unit’s Power indication is on.2. Align the antenna (integrated into the front side of the SU-RA outdoor unit or separate if the unit is an SU-RE) to point in the general direction of the base station.3. The RSSI bar display is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit. The eight green RSSI LEDs are used for reading the Received Signal Strength Indication. The higher the number of green LEDs that are on, the higher the level of the received signal. Rotate the antenna left and/or right until you reach the maximum RSSI reading (as many green bars lit as possible). Make sure that at all times the front of the antenna faces the general direction of the base station.4. For proper operation, at least one green LED should be on. If you cannot reach a point where at least one green LED is on, try to improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in a different location.5. Firmly secure the unit (SU-RA) or the antenna to the pole.NOTE:Antenna alignment using the RSSI bar display is possible only after the Access Unit you wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters in the Subscriber Unit were properly configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the Access Unit. As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames, its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit.NOTE:As the RSSI bar indicator is not accurate, it is recommended to use the Continuous Link Quality Display test for more precise alignment of the antenna.NOTE:In some cases (e.g., when the Subscriber Unit is very close to the Base Station), the antenna may have to be installed at an appropriate angle, in order to ensure that it is directed towards the base station antenna.
2-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 3ConnectingExternal AlarmDevicesThis chapter explains how to connect external devices to the AL IN and AL OUT connectors of the Base Station unit.About This Chapter
3-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01Connecting External Devices to the GU-BS AL IN and/or AL OUT Connectors Open-ended cables are available from the company for connecting to the module external alarm inputs through the AL IN connector and/or activating external devices through the AL OUT connector. See the tables that follow for descriptions of the connectors’ pins functionality. For details on defining and using the alarm inputs and output, refer to Book 4: Operation and Administration.Alarms In CableThe other side of the cable is supplied open-ended.WARNING:The load of the Alarm Out (AL OUT) connector should not exceed 24 V@1 A max.9-pin Micro D-Type AL IN Connector Description Color Code1Alarm Input 1 Brown2Alarm Input 2 White3Alarm Input 3 Green4Alarm Input 4 Red5Not Connected Black6GND Purple7GND Yellow 8GND Orange9GND Blue
External Devices 3-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualAlarms Out CableThe other side of the cable is supplied open-ended.9-pin Micro D-Type AL OUT Connector Description Color Code1Relay 1 Common Brown2Relay 1 Normally Closed White3Relay 2 Common Green4Relay 3 Common Red5Relay 3 Normally Closed Black6Relay 1 Normally Open Purple7Relay 2 Normally Closed Yellow8Relay 2 Normally Open Orange9Relay 3 Normally Open Blue
3-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 4VerifyingProper OperationThis chapter explains how to confirm that the BreezeACCESS system is functioning properly and includes the following sections:!Verifying Connectivity‚ page 4-2, explains how to ensure that your BreezeACCESS and the equipment connected to them are operating properly.!LED Indicators‚ page 4-4, lists the LEDs found on BreezeACCESS units and their meanings.About This Chapter
4-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01Verifying ConnectivityVerifying the Ethernet ConnectionOnce you have connected the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity indicator (the yellow LED embedded in the Ethernet connector) is on, indicating that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment. The Ethernet Activity indicator (the green embedded LED) should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the Ethernet port.Verifying Data Connectivity (Subscriber Unit)From a user’s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit, ping the Access Unit or try to connect to the Internet.Verifying Telephone Connectivity (Subscriber Units with Voice support)To verify correct operation of the telephone, a test telephone with the default telephony parameters and a known IP address should be connected to the system (the location of the test telephone is determined by the system administrator).Perform the following steps to verify telephone connectivity:1. Use IP dialing to call the test telephone: dial * followed by the 12-digit IP address of the test telephone. Verify connectivity. During the conversation, verify that the other party has your IP address.2. After terminating the call, the other party should use the test telephone to call your IP address and verify that the telephone, including the ringing circuits, functions properly.
Verifying Proper Operation 4-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualVerifying Proper Operation of the GU-RA GPS AntennaWhen the unit is operating properly, the PWR and OK green LEDS should be on, indicating that the unit is supplying power to the GPS antenna and that the GPS antenna is functioning properly. If the OK LED is not on, check the functionality of the GPS antenna as follows:1. From the Main Menu, select Info Screens.The Info Screens menu opens.2. From the Info Screen menu, select Show Unit Status and view the Unit Status display. You should see one of the following messages:UTC is available; date..; time..: This message indicates that the GPS antenna has synchronized with the satellite system and that the BS-GU is functioning properly. The message may include an incorrect time and date, such as a date in 1999: this indicates that the GPS antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite system.–Or–UTC time is not available: This message indicates that the BS-GU is not getting timing signals from the GPS antenna. If the antenna is functioning and properly connected to the module, a probable reason might be that the antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite system.NOTE:It may take up to 10 minutes from the time the GU-RA GPS antenna is powered up until it is fully synchronized with the GPS satellite system.
4-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01LED IndicatorsTo verify correct operation of the units, view the status of the relevant LED indicators:SU-RA/RE Outdoor Units LEDsAU-RE Outdoor Units LEDsName Description FunctionalityALARM Alarm indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the locking process of any of the synthesizersOff – Normal operationWLNK Wireless link activity Blinking – Receiving packet from the wireless linkOff – No reception of packets from the wireless linkETH Ethernet activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet LANOff – No activity on the Ethernet LANName Description FunctionalityALARM Alarm indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the locking process of any of the synthesizersOff –Normal operation12V IN 12 VDC Power IndicationOn – 12 VDC power is supplied to the unitOff – 12 VDC power is not availableETH Ethernet activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet LANOff – No activity on the Ethernet LAN
Verifying Proper Operation 4-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualSU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Units LEDsBS-PS DC Power Supply Module LEDsBS-PS-AC AC Power Supply Module LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power supply On – After successful power up, indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit. Off – Power off or DC/DC converter failure (12 VDC not supplied to the outdoor unit)WLNK Wireless link activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the wireless mediaOff – No reception of packets from the wireless mediaName DescriptionON -48 VDC is available and Power Supply is ON5V The 5V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one BS-AU module is inserted)12V The 12V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one AU-RA/RE unit is connected)Name Description3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3 V power supply module is OK (3.3V power supply is not used by current BreezeACCESS modules)5V Green LED. Indicates that the 5 V power supply module is OK 12V Green LED. Indicates that the 12 V power supply module is OK OVERTEMP Red LED. Indicates an Over Temperature condition in the power supply module
4-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 CommissioningManual Revision: 1.01BS-AU LEDsBS-GU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power supply 12 VDC On – After successful power up, indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit. Off – Power off or DC/DC converter failure (12 VDC not supplied to the outdoor unit)WLNK Wireless link activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the wireless mediaOff – No reception of packets from the wireless mediaALRM Alarm On – Loss of hopping synchronization (in Slave mode)MASTER Master unit On – The unit is configured as MasterLED Name FunctionalityPWR (green) On – Power supply functioning properly.Off – Power supply not functioning properly.OK (green) On – Proper signals are being received from the GPS antenna.Off – The GPS antenna is not connected or it is not functioning properly.A1 (red) On – Alarm In 1 (external) is activated.A2 (red) On – Alarm In 2 (external) is activated.A3 (red) On – Alarm In 3 (external) is activated.A4 (red) On – Alarm In 4 (external) is activated.A5, A6 (red) Reserved for future use.
BreezeACCESS VSystem Manual Book 4:Operations and Administration
Operationsand AdministrationTable of ContentsAccessing the Monitor Program ......................................................1-1Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector ............................................................1-2Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet ........................1-4Operating the Monitor Program ...............................................1-6Menus and Parameters .......................................................2-1Main Menu ..................................................................................2-2Info Screens Menu .....................................................................2-3Show Unit Status ................................................................2-3Show Basic Parameters .....................................................2-5Show Advanced Parameters ..............................................2-5Show All Parameters ..........................................................2-5Unit Control Menu ......................................................................2-6Basic Configuration Menu ......................................................2-10Site Survey Menu .....................................................................2-12Traffic Statistics (AU and SU) ...........................................2-12Voice Statistics (SU with Voice Support Only) .................2-15Per Hop Statistics (AU and SU) .......................................2-15Ping Test (AU, SU and GU) .............................................2-16Continuous Link Quality Display (Available in SU Only) ......................................................2-17MAC Address Database (Available in AU Only) ...............2-17Per-rate Counters (AU and SU) .......................................2-19RSSI Display Option (AU and SU) ...................................2-20Advanced Configuration Menu ...............................................2-21IP Parameters (AU, SU and GU) ......................................2-21Air Interface Parameters (AU and SU) .............................2-22Network Management Parameters (AU, SU and GU) ......2-41Bridge Parameters (AU, SU and GU) ...............................2-43Performance Parameters (AU and SU) ............................2-55Service Parameters (AU and SU) ....................................2-58
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationSecurity Parameters (AU and SU) ...................................2-62Voice Parameters (Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) ....................2-63Dialing Parameters (Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) ....................2-64Telephony Signals (Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) .....................2-71Hopping Parameters (GU) ...............................................2-77Alarm Parameters (GU) ...................................................2-78Configuration Download/Upload .....................................................3-1
Chapter 1Accessing theMonitor ProgramThis chapter explains how to access the monitor program. It also describes how to use the monitor program to set up, configure, and manage BreezeACCESS Broadband Wireless Access system units. This includes the Subscriber Units (SUs), Access Units (AUs) and GPS and Alarms modules (GUs). About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector1. Use the monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the unit to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC. The COM port connector on the monitor cable is a 9-pin D-type plug.2. Run a terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal™).3. Set the communication parameters to the following:4. Press Enter. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access level according to your authorized access level. You will be requested to enter your password. After entering the correct password, press Enter.Table 1-1‚ page 3 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels.NOTE:The GU-BS GPS and Alarms module does not have an external MON port. It does have an internal MON port that can be used in laboratory conditions (consult Alvarion technical support for further details). It is recommended to use Telnet to access the monitor program of the GU-BS.Baud Rate 9600Data Bits 8Stop Bits 1Parity NoneFlow Control Xon/XoffConnector Connected COM port
Accessing the Monitor Program 1-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 1-1: Default PasswordsAccess Rights PasswordRead Only publicInstaller userAdministrator privateNOTE:Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords) from either the monitor port or via Telnet, the monitor program will be blocked for five minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during that time, the unit must be reset (via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power).
1-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet1. Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the unit. See the table below to determine the type of cable. Configure the PC’s IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit (the default IP Address is 10.0.0.1). Run the Telnet application.Table 1-2: Required Type of Ethernet Cable2. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access level according to your authorized access level. You will be requested to enter your password. After entering the correct password press Enter. The Main Menu appears.Figure 1-1: Main Menu – Administrator Access Rights (SU and AU)The appearance of the Main Menu varies in accordance with the set access level.Unit Type Connection to a PC Connection to a HubSubscriber Units Straight CrossedAccess Units Crossed StraightGPS module Straight CrossedBreezeACCESS/AU-BSOfficial Release Version – 4.0.40Release Date: Thu Dec 20 20:21:36 2001Main Menu=====================1 – Info Screens2 – Unit Control3 – Basic Configuration4 – Site Survey5 – Advanced ConfigurationX - Exit>>>
Accessing the Monitor Program 1-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!For users with Read Only access rights, only the Info Screens option is displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Unit Control, Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus.!For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items (Info Screens, Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey) are displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Advanced Configuration menu. !For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu will be displayed. These users can access all the menu items.NOTE:The Main Menu of the GU-BS (GPS and Alarms module) does not include the Basic Configuration option.
1-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Operating the Monitor Program1. Type an option number to open/activate the option. You may need to press Enter in some cases.2. Press Esc to exit a menu or option.3. You can log-out and exit the monitor program from the Main Menu by selecting X (exit). To get to the Main Menu from anywhere in the program, press the Esc key several times. You can also exit the monitor from anywhere in the program by simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and X keys.4. Reset the unit after making configuration changes for the new values to take effect.NOTE:The program will terminate automatically after a given period of inactivity specified by the Log-Out Timer parameter.NOTE:Most parameters take effect only after the unit is reset. However, some parameters take effect immediately (run-time configurable). Appendix D includes information on all parameters, including which are run-time configurable.
Chapter 2Menusand ParametersThis chapter describes the BreezeACCESS configuration menus and parameters. It includes the following sections:! Main Menu‚ page 2-2.!Info Screens Menu‚ page 2-3.!Unit Control Menu‚ page 2-6.! Basic Configuration Menu‚ page 2-10.!Site Survey Menu‚ page 2-12.!Advanced Configuration Menu‚ page 2-21.About This Chapter
2-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Main MenuFrom the Main Menu you can access the following menus, depending on your access level:!Info Screens – Provides read-only display of current parameter values. Available at all access levels.!Unit Control – Enables access to general operations such as resetting the unit, loading the default parameters, changing passwords and switching between software versions. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels.!Basic Configuration – Enables access to the set of parameters that should be configured as a part of the installation process. These parameters are also accessible from the Advanced Configuration menu. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels in SU and AU (does not exist in GU).!Site Survey – Enables activation of certain tests and viewing of various system counters. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels.!Advanced Configuration – Enables access to all system parameters, including the parameters that are included in the Basic Configuration menu. Available only at the Administrator access level.!Exit – Enables log-out and exit from the monitor program. Available at all access levels.
Menus and Parameters 2-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualInfo Screens MenuFigure 2-1: Info Screens MenuThe Info Screens menu enables viewing of the current values of various parameter sets. The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in the configuration menus. The user can view a specific parameter set or can elect to view all parameters (S). This menu is available for all access levels.Show Unit StatusThe Show Unit Status menu displays the current values of the following parameters:!Unit Type – Identifies the unit’s function as one of the following: Access Unit, Subscriber Unit or GPS and Alarms Module. !Unit MAC Address – Displays the unit’s unique IEEE MAC address. !Unit Hardware Version – Displays the hardware version of the unit (the indoor module of IF based products).!Flash Type – Displays the type and size of the Flash memory.!Flash Versions"Current Version – Displays the software version that is currently active."Shadow Version – Displays the software version currently defined as the shadow (backup) version."Version After Reset – Displays the software version that will be used after the next reset.BreezeACCESS/AU-BSOfficial Release Version – 4.0.40Release Date: Thu Dec 20 21:05:08 2001Info Screens====================1 – Show Unit Status2 – Show Basic Parameters3 – Show Advanced ParametersS – Show All Parameters>>>
2-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!Console Speed – Displays the speed defined in the unit for the connected terminal, used for running the terminal emulation program.!Number of Associations Since Last Reset – In SUs displays the total number of associations with any AU since the last reset, including duplicate associations with the same AU. In AUs, displays the number of SUs that have associated with the AU since the last reset, including duplicate associations with the same SU.The following parameters appear for Subscriber Units only:!Voice Hardware Version (SU with voice support only) – Displays the hardware version of the voice module.!Unit Status – Displays the current status of the SU. There are two possible values: "SCANNING – The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate."ASSOCIATED – The SU is associated with an AU. !AU MAC Address – Displays the MAC address of the AU with which the unit is currently associated. If the unit is not associated with any AU, the address will be that of the IEEE broadcast address: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.The following parameter appears for Access Units only:!Current Number of Associations – Displays the total number of SUs associated with this AU. This number may include units that are not currently active, as there is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. The following parameter appears for GPS Modules only:!Unit Status – Indicates the status of the GPS antenna. Either one of the following messages may be displayed:"UTC is available; date..; time..: This message indicates that the GPS antenna has synchronized with the satellite system and that the BS-GU is functioning properly. The message may include an incorrect time and date, such as a date in 1999. This indicates that the GPS antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellites system.–Or–"UTC time is not available: This message indicates that the BS-GU is not getting timing signals from the GPS NOTE:An SU will be removed from the list of associated SUs only upon occurrence of any of the following: (1) The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU, or (2) The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it.
Menus and Parameters 2-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manualantenna. If the antenna is functioning and properly connected to the module, this may be because the antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite system.Show Basic ParametersThe Show Basic Parameters menu displays the current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu (see Basic Configuration Menu‚ page 2-10). When using Read-Only access rights the ESSID and WEP Keys are not displayed. The display includes some additional useful read-only information such as the Number of Hopping Frequencies in SU and AU. Show Advanced ParametersThe Show Advanced Parameters menu enables access sub-menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the applicable sub-menus of the Advanced Configuration menu (see Advanced Configuration Menu‚ page 2-21). When using Read-Only access rights the ESSID (Air Interface Parameters) and WEP Keys (Security Parameters) are not displayed. The display includes some additional read-only information such as Number of Hopping Frequencies (Air Interface Parameters).Show All ParametersThe Show All Parameters menu displays the current values of all the parameters included in the Advanced Configuration menu. When using Read-Only access rights, ESSID and WEP Keys are not displayed. The display includes some additional useful read-only information such as the Number of Hopping Frequencies (SU and AU).
2-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Unit Control MenuThe Unit Control menu includes the following options:!Reset Unit – Resets the BreezeACCESS unit and applies any changes made to the system parameters. !Defaults Settings – Resets the unit to a predefined set of default parameters or to save the current configuration as Operator Defaults. The available options are:"Set Defaults – Resets the unit to a set of default parameters. The following options are available:#Cancel Request – Exits to the Unit Control menu without any change.#Set Complete Factory Defaults – Available only with Administrator access rights. Resets the unit to the set of Alvarion’s standard default values. These are the default values as defined in this manual for each of the parameters. After the next Reset Unit command (see above) all parameters will revert to their Factory Defaults value, except for the Passwords.#Set Partial Factory Defaults – Resets all parameters to the values of the Factory Defaults configuration, except for parameters that are necessary to maintain connectivity and to enable management. These are the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu, except to the Maximum Data Rate parameter. In addition, Passwords and VLAN parameters are not changed.#Set Complete Operator Defaults – Available only with Administrator access rights. Set the unit to its’ Operator Defaults configuration. After the next Reset Unit command (see above) all parameters will revert to their Operator Defaults values, except for the Passwords. Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the Administrator (see Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults below). It may also be defined at the factory according to customer’s definition. The default Operators Defaults configuration is the Factory Defaults configuration. The complete Operator Defaults Configuration file can be downloaded/uploaded using TFTP with the SNMP Write NOTE:Activating Set Complete Factory Defaults will result in loss of connectivity. If the unit is managed remotely, you may lose the ability to communicate with it.
Menus and Parameters 2-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manualcommunity string. The procedure is the same as for downloading/uploading configuration files, except that the extension used for the file name is .cmr. Examples (using the default SNMP Write community string):To upload the configuration file using DOS based TFTP Client to an SU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65: tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cmr.To download the configuration file from the same unit:tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cmr Suconf"Set Partial Operator Defaults – Sets all parameters to the values of the Operator Defaults configuration, except for parameters that are necessary to maintain connectivity and to enable management. These are the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu with the exception of the Maximum Data Rate parameter. In addition, Passwords and VLAN parameters are not changed."Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults – Defines the current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration. This option is only available with Administrator access rights.!Change Unit Name – Changes the name of the unit, which is also the system name in MIB2. This name is also used as the prompt of the monitor program menus. Valid values: A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters.!Change Password – Changes the password(s). A user with Installer access rights can change the passwords for Read Only and Installer levels. A user with Administrator access rights can change the passwords of all levels.Valid values: A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters.Table 1-1‚ page 1-3 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels.NOTE:Activating Set Complete Operator Defaults will result in loss of connectivity. If the unit is managed remotely, you may lose the ability to communicate with it.NOTE:The Passwords are not changed upon setting the unit to default values (either Partial or Complete).
2-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!Flash Memory Control – Selects the active software version. The following options are available:"Reset and Boot from Shadow Version – Activates the Shadow (backup) software version. The unit resets automatically and loads the shadow firmware."Use Current Version After Reset – Defines the current version as the one that will be activated and used after the next reset.The flash memory can store two software versions. One version is called Current and the other is called Shadow. New software versions are loaded as the Shadow version. You can select the Shadow version as the new active version by selecting Reset and Boot from Shadow Version. However, after the next reset, the Current version will be activated again. If you wish to continue using the currently active version after the next reset, select Use Current Version After Reset.The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of downloading new software versions (unless the new version includes additional parameters or other changes in the list of parameters). New parameters are loaded with their default values.!Console Speed – Defines the speed at which the unit communicates with the terminal running the terminal emulation program. This parameter must be changed prior to changing the speed of the terminal connected to it. The allowed speeds are: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud.The default value is 9600 baud.!Log Out Timer – Enters a new Log Out Timer value. If the monitor program is not used for the specified time, the unit will automatically exit the monitor program. The allowed range is 1 to 999 minutes.The default value is 5 minutes. !Event Log Menu – Controls the event log feature. The event log is an important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it. Events are classified according to their severity level: Trace (lowest severity), Message, Warning, Error or Fatal (highest severity). The severity at which events are saved in the Event Log is configurable. Events from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed upon request. Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current active events. In the log an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased (a maximum of 1000 events may be displayed). The error log may be read using TFTP, with remote file name <SNMP Read Community>.log (the default SNMP Read Community is public).
Menus and Parameters 2-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe Event Log Menu includes the following options:"Event Log Policy – Determines the minimal severity level. All events whose severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged. Valid values are: Log All (TRC) Level, Message (MSG) Level, Warning (WRN) Level, Error (ERR) Level, Fatal (FTL) Level, Log None.The default selection is Fatal (FTL) Level."Display Event Log – Displays how many events are logged and selects the number of events to be displayed (up to 1000). The display of each event includes the event time (elapsed time since last reset), the severity level and a message string. The events are displayed in descending order, with the most recent event displayed first."Erase Event Log – Clears the event log.
2-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Basic Configuration MenuThe Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters that are necessary for the initial installation and operation of the unit. Once the unit is properly installed and operational, other parameters can be configured either locally using the monitor program or remotely using Telnet, SNMP management or TFTP for loading to the unit a pre-prepared configuration file. For more information about the initial configuration of BreezeACCESS units, see Book 3: Commissioning.The Basic Configuration menu includes the following submenu parameters:IP Parameters!IP Address (see page 2-21)!Subnet Mask (see page 2-21)!Default Gateway Address (see page 2-21)!DHCP Client (see page 2-22)Air Interface Parameters !ESSID (see page 2-33)!Operator ESSID Parameters (AU) (see page 2-33)!Hopping Band* (see page 2-22)!Flexible Hopping Definition* (see page 2-24)!Hopping Sync (AU-BS) (see page 2-35)!Hopping Shift (AU-BS) (see page 2-28) !Best AU Parameters (SU) (see page 2-35)"Best AU Support"Preferred AU MAC Address!Maximum Data Rate (SU) (see page 2-36)*The Hopping Band and Flexible Hopping Definition parameters are not available in units configured in the factory to operate in ISM US FCC hopping standard only (US Option).VLAN Parameters!VLAN ID – Management (AU and SU without voice support) (see page 2-44)
Menus and Parameters 2-11BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!VLAN ID – Voice & Management (SU with voice support) (see page 2-45)!VLAN Link Type (see page 2-46)Security Parameters!Authentication Algorithm (see page 2-62)!Default Key ID (see page 2-62)!WEP Key # 1 (see page 2-62)!WEP Key # 2 (see page 2-62)!WEP Key # 3 (see page 2-62)!WEP Key # 4 (see page 2-62)NOTE:All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the appropriate submenus of the Advanced Configuration menu.
2-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Site Survey MenuThe Site Survey menu provides various tests and counters for verifying the quality of the wireless link and the proper operation of the unit. These tests can be used to help determine where to position the units for optimal coverage, to align antennas and to assist in troubleshooting.Traffic Statistics (AU and SU)The traffic statistics can be used to monitor, interpret and analyze the wired and wireless links performance. The traffic statistics counters display statistics concerning wireless link and Ethernet frames. The menu includes the following options:!Display Counters – Choose this option to display the current value of the Ethernet and Wireless Link Counters.!Reset Counters – Choose this option to reset all the counters.Ethernet CountersThe unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards them to its internal bridge which decides whether the frame should be transmitted to the wireless media. Frames that were discarded by the unit’s hardware filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters.The unit transmits valid data frames that were received from the wireless media to the Ethernet port, as well as some internally generated frames (e.g. responses to management queries and pings that reached the unit from the Ethernet port).!Total received frames via Ethernet – Displays the total number of frames received from the Ethernet port. !Transmitted wireless to Ethernet – Displays the number of frames transmitted by the unit to the Ethernet port. These are usually frames that have been received from the wireless side, but also frames generated by the unit itself.
Menus and Parameters 2-13BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualWireless Link CountersThe unit transmits data frames received from the Ethernet port, as well as self-generated control and wireless management frames, to the wireless media. After transmission of a data frame, the unit waits for an acknowledgement (ACK) message from the receiving unit. Some control and wireless management frames as well as broadcast and multicast frames that are sent to more than one unit are not acknowledged. If an ACK is not received after a predefined time (determined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter, see page 2-38), the unit will retransmit the frame until it receives an ACK. If an ACK is not received before the number of retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number (Number of Retransmissions parameter, see page 2-55), it stops retransmitting and drops the frames.!Total transmitted frames to wireless – Displays the number of frames transmitted to the wireless media. The total includes one count for each data or RTP frame (internally generated voice frame) that was transmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions) as well as the number of transmitted control and wireless management frames. If the ACSE Option (see page 2-40) is enabled, then in addition to the total count, there are also separate counters for the total number of data frames, voice (RTP) frames and beacon frames. The voice frames include fax frames. This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option parameter in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice count should be 0.!Total submitted frames (bridge) – Displays the total number of data and RTP frames submitted to the bridge for transmission to the wireless media. The count does not include control frames, wireless management frames, and retransmissions. In addition to the total count, there are also separate counts for frames according to the priority queue to which they were routed (Low, Mid, or High). If the ACSE Option is enabled, then the Low, Mid and High counts are for data frames only and there is an additional counter for voice (RTP) frames. The voice frames count includes fax frames. This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice count should be 0.!Frames dropped (too many retries) – Displays the number of dropped frames. The frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged. If the ACSE Option is enabled, then in addition to the total count, there are also separate counters for total number of data frames and voice (RTP) frames. The voice frames count includes fax frames. This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells
2-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice count should be 0.!Total retransmitted frames – Displays the total number of retransmissions of frames (counts all unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions). If the ACSE Option is enabled, then in addition to the total count, there are also separate counters for total number of Data frames and Voice (RTP) frames. This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice count should be 0.!Total Tx errors – Displays the number of transmit errors that have occurred. The total number of Tx errors includes transmissions that were not acknowledged properly, transmissions that were aborted and transmissions that were delayed for various reasons (e.g. not enough time until the end of the current dwell period).In addition, the following special counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the error:"H/W: An internal hardware problem in the modem."ABR: The transmission was aborted before completion because of internal problems in the DSP."CSL: The transmission was cancelled because the modem was busy in receiving data."ACKTOUT (Acknowledge Timeout): The frame was not acknowledged within the time defined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter."FAIL: There was an internal timeout in the modem."ACKCRC: There was a CRC error in the ACK message."RTSC: The RTS was sent but no CTS was received (RTS collision)."EOD (End of Dwell): There was not enough time left to transmit the message!Total received frames from wireless – Displays the total number of frames that were received from the wireless media. The count includes data, control and wireless management frames, including beacons received from the AU. The count does not include frames that were discarded internally, bad frames and duplicate frames.!Total received data frames – Displays the total number of data frames received from the wireless media, including duplicate frames (see Duplicate frames discarded, below). In addition to the total count, there are also separate counts for data frames according to the receive priority queue to which they were routed (Low or High). !Bad fragments received – Displays the number of frames received from the wireless media with errors (CRC errors).
Menus and Parameters 2-15BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!Duplicate frames discarded – Displays the number of frames discarded due to receiving multiple copies. If an acknowledge message was not received by the originating unit, the same data frame can be properly received twice (or more). Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that count data frames, only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port.!Internally discarded MIR/CIR – Displays the number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum allowed information rate.Voice Statistics (SU with Voice Support Only)The voice statistics counters display information concerning voice and fax traffic, including T.38 redundant fax traffic. The displayed information includes the accumulated numbers since the last reset for transmitted and received RTP frames and bytes. !Display Counters – Displays the current value of the following voice counters."Voice Frames Transmitted"Voice Frames Received"Voice Bytes Transmitted"Voice Bytes Received!Reset Counters – Resets the voice counters.Per Hop Statistics (AU and SU)The Per Hop Statistics provide information on performance of the wireless signal at different hopping frequencies. The Per Hop Statistics menu includes the following options:!Display Counters – Displays the continuously updated statistics.!Reset Counters – Resets the Per Hop Statistics counters.The Display Counters option displays various statistics for each of the hopping frequencies. In addition, it displays some general wireless link performance statistics.
2-16 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01The Rx, Tx and RTx per hop counters accumulate the number of applicable frames since last reset. The counters can also be reset using the Reset Counters option in either the Per Hop Statistics menu or in the Traffic Counters menu. The general rate (Frames per second) statistics is the average rate during the last 64 hops. The display is continuously updated. Press any key to exit.Ping Test (AU, SU and GU)The Ping Test menu includes the following options:!Destination IP Address – Displays the IP address of the destination unit for pinging. Allows entering an IP address (4 x 3 digit octets, separated by dots). The default IP address is 192.000.000.001.!No. of Pings – Enter the number of ping attempts per session. The allowed range is from 0 to 9999. Select 0 for continuous pinging.The default value is 1. !Ping Frame Length – Enter the ping packet size. The allowed range is from 60 to 1472 bytes. The default value is 64 bytes. !Ping Frame Timeout – Enter the ping frame timeout, which is the amount of time (in ms) to wait between ping attempts. The allowed range is from 200 to 60000 ms, in increments of 200 milliseconds (200, 400, 600,……60000).The default value is 200 ms.Num The number of the information row, assigned automatically and sequentially by the program.Freq The hopping frequency, according to the hopping sequence.Rx The accumulated number of frames received at the specified frequency since last reset.Tx The accumulated number of frames transmitted successfully at the specified frequency since last reset.RTx The accumulated number of frames re-transmitted at the specified frequency since last reset.avrDBM (avrRSSI) The average RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) in dBm or RSSI units (according to the RSSI Display Option) of all the frames received at the specified frequency since the last reset. If no frames have been received, the avrRSSI is NA (Not Available).
Menus and Parameters 2-17BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!Start Sending – Starts transmission of ping frames.!Stop Sending – Stops the transmission of ping frames. The test will end automatically once the number of pings that were sent have reached the value specified in the No. of Pings parameter (described above). The Stop Sending option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of pings, or if continuous pinging was selected.!Show Ping Test Values – To display the current values of the ping test parameters, the transmission status (sending or not), the number of pings sent, and the number of pings received (acknowledged frames).Continuous Link Quality Display (Available in SU Only)This option displays a continuously updated table that includes information on the quality of the received signal (Received Signal Strength Indication or RSSI). Press any key to abort the test.Each line includes the number of frames that were received since the last measurement (total Rx), the average RSSI in dBm or RSSI units (according to the RSSI Display Option) for these frames (avrDBM/avrRSSI) and the Error rate (number of retransmitted frames in the last 100 transmitted frames).The Error rate is meaningful only when there is traffic from the SU to the AU. It is recommended to use the Ping Test (see page 2-16) with a Ping Frame Length of 1472 bytes.MAC Address Database (Available in AU Only)The MAC Address Database displays information on the subscriber units associated with the AU as well as bridging (forwarding) information. The following options are available:!Display Bridging & Association Info – Displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations in the Forwarding Database of the AU. For stations behind an SU, the SU’s MAC address is also displayed. Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, as follows:"Et (Ethernet): Addresses that have been learned from the Ethernet port."Vp (Virtual port): Addresses of the nodes behind an associated SU. For these addresses, the address of the SU is displayed in parenthesis.
2-18 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01"St (Static): An associated SU. These entries also include the SW Version of the SU."Sp (Special): 5 Addresses that always exist:#The MAC address of the AU (appears twice as it is learned from both the Ethernet and the wireless ports)#Alvarion’s Multicast address (01:20:D6:00:00:01, also twice). The system handles this address as a Broadcast address.#The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF)In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database (Bridging Info), the Associated Subscriber Units Database (Association Info) and the Subscriber Units that are currently conducting a voice call (Call Info). For each of these databases, the displayed information includes:#The current number of entries. The number of entries in the Bridging Info includes the Et (Ethernet) and the Vp (Virtual ports) entries. The number of entries in the Association Info includes the associated units. #The aging time specified for entries in these tables (the defaults are 300 seconds for the Bridge Aging Time, No Aging for the Association Aging Time and 1800 seconds for the Call Info table).#The maximum allowed number of entries for these tables (1019 for the Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter for the Association Info and the Call Info. The default value of the Maximum Number of Associations is 512).!Display Association Info – Displays details of the associated SUs. Each entry in the list includes the following information:"The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit"The Maximum Data Rate of the SU."The average level of RF signals received from the Subscriber Unit."The wireless status of the SU. There are three options:#AssociatedNOTE:There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU will be removed from the associations database only upon occurrence of any of the following: (1) The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU, or (2) The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it.
Menus and Parameters 2-19BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual#Authenticated#Not Authenticated (a temporary status)"The SW version of the SU.!Display CIR/MIR Info: Displays details of the CIR/MIR parameters of the associated SUs. Each entry in the list includes the following information:"The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit"The SW version of the SU."MIR/CIR info for the SU: #CIR Tx (SU to AU) #MIR Tx (SU to AU) #CIR Rx (AU to SU) #MIR Rx (AU to SU) #Max. Delay.Per-rate Counters (AU and SU)Resets or displays the per-rate counters. The per-rate counters display the number of frames (excluding retransmissions) transmitted since the last reset at each of the rates (1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3 Mbps) and the total number of frames that were retransmitted at each of the rates. In the Message Direction Status in AUSU ScanningProbe Request(including ESSID) - Scanning SU → AU -Probe Response (only if correct ESSID in Probe Request) AU → SU -SU SynchronizedAuthentication Request SU → AU Not AuthenticatedChallenge Text AU → SU Not AuthenticatedChallenge Text Encrypted SU → AU Not AuthenticatedAuthentication Successful AU → SU AuthenticatedSU AuthenticatedAssociation Request SU → AU AuthenticatedAssociation Successful AU → SU AssociatedACK SU → AU AssociatedData Traffic SU ↔ AU Associated
2-20 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01AU the information is provided for each of the associated SUs, identified by their MAC address. The counters in the AU are reset when there is a new association with an SU (including reassociations).RSSI Display Option (AU and SU)In BreezeACCESS units running SW versions 3.X and below, all measurements of received RF signal levels are displayed using arbitrary RSSI units. From version 4.0 onward, the conventional dBm measurement units can be used. However, to support users that prefer to continue using RSSI units, the RSSI Display dBm option selects the measurement units to be used for displaying received signal level values.Available selections: dBm, RSSI.Default selection: RSSI.
Menus and Parameters 2-21BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualAdvanced Configuration MenuThe Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all the parameters, including the parameters that are available through the Basic Configuration menu.The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to the following menus:!IP Parameters (AU, SU and GU) (see page 2-21)!Air Interface Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-22)!Network Management Parameters (AU, SU and GU) (see page 2-41)!Bridge Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-43)!VLAN Parameters (GU) (see page 2-43)!Performance Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-55)!Service Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-58)!Security Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-62)!Voice Parameters (SU with voice support) (see page 2-63)!Dialing Parameters (SU with voice support) (see page 2-64)!Telephony Signals Parameters (SU with voice support) (see page 2-71)!Hopping Parameters (GU) (see page 2-77)!Alarm Parameters (GU) (see page 2-78)IP Parameters (AU, SU and GU)The IP Parameters sub-menu allows configuration of the following parameters:!IP Address – Displays the current IP address of the unit and allows the entry of a new IP address (four sets of three digits, separated by dots).The default IP Address is 010.000.000.001.!Subnet Mask – Displays the current subnet mask of the unit and allows entry of a new subnet mask (four sets of three digits, separated by dots). The default mask is 255.000.000.000.!Default Gateway Address – Displays the current address of the default gateway of the unit and allows entry of a new default gateway address (four sets of three digits, separated by dots). The default is 000.000.000.000.
2-22 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!DHCP Client "DHCP Options – Displays the current status of the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) support, and allows selecting a new operation mode. The available options are:#Disable – Use manual procedure for configuring the IP parameters.#DHCP Only – Search for a DHCP Server and obtain the IP parameters from it (IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address).#Automatic – Search for a DHCP Server for configuration of the IP parameters. If a DHCP Server is not found within approximately 40 seconds, use the currently configured IP parameters.The default is Disable."Access to DHCP – To define the port through which the unit is allowed to communicate with a DHCP server. The options are:#From Wlan Only#From Ethernet Only#From Both Ethernet & WlanThe default for an Access Unit is From Ethernet Only. The default for a Subscriber Unit is From Wlan Only.!Show IP Parameters – Displays the current values of the IP Parameters.Air Interface Parameters (AU and SU)Hopping Frequencies Setting ParametersThe process of setting the hopping sequence includes the following steps:a. Select the frequencies to be usedb. Define the method of generating the basic hopping sequence based on the set of selected frequencies. The method of generating the basic sequence also defines the hopping shift mechanism for generating different actual hopping sequences.NOTE:The Access to DHCP option is not available in the GU, as this module does not have a wireless link interface.
Menus and Parameters 2-23BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manualc. Define a different hopping sequence for each AU in order to minimize interference between adjacent AUs.!Hopping Band – Available in units with INT option only. Defines the method of generating the basic hopping sequence. The available selections are ISM US FCC, ISM International and Flexible Hopping Definition. "ISM US FCC: The basic hopping sequence is as defined in the IEEE 802.11 standard and shown in Table 2-1. There are 79 hopping frequencies, using channels 2 to 80. (The channel number is the distance in MHz from the beginning of the frequency band, so that channel number 2 is at 5727MHz). Synchronization is not supported (Hopping Sync parameter is set to Idle and cannot be changed). "ISM International: The basic hopping sequence is as defined in the IEEE 802.11 standard and shown in Table 2-1. There are 79 hopping frequencies, using channels 2 to 80. (The channel number is the distance in MHz from the beginning of the frequency band, so that channel number 2 is at 5727MHz). Synchronization (Hopping Sync) is supported. "Flexible Hopping Definition: The Flexible Hopping Definition menu should be used to define the basic hopping sequence.NOTE:The same method for generating the basic hopping sequence (and the hopping shift mechanism) should be used for all units in the system to enable SUs to communicate with the AUs and to support radio planning that will provide minimal interference between neighboring sectors.NOTE:In units that are configured in the factory to operate only in ISM US FCC hopping standard (US Option), the Hopping Band menu is not available.
2-24 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Table 2-1: ISM Basic Hopping Sequence!Flexible Hopping Definition –Adds and removes frequencies to/from the list of hopping frequencies; displays the selected hopping frequencies and the current hopping sequence (based on the previous selections made before the last reset). The new selections will come into effect only after the next reset.Index Channel#Frequency(MHz) Index Channel#Frequency(MHz) Index Channel#Frequency(MHz)1 2 5727 28 5 5730 55 15 57402 25 5750 29 39 5764 56 35 57603 64 5789 30 12 5737 57 67 57924 10 5735 31 36 5761 58 52 57775 45 5770 32 68 5793 59 58 57836 18 5743 33 9 5734 60 44 57697 73 5798 34 70 5795 61 50 57758 49 5774 35 77 5802 62 17 57429 21 5746 36 6 5731 63 7 573210 63 5788 37 62 5787 64 19 574411 78 5803 38 29 5754 65 8 573312 31 5756 39 14 5739 66 69 579413 61 5786 40 27 5752 67 51 577614 24 5749 41 16 5741 68 42 576715 54 5779 42 59 5784 69 3 572816 65 5790 43 43 5768 70 30 575517 28 5753 44 76 5801 71 57 578218 79 5804 45 34 5759 72 37 576219 33 5758 46 72 5797 73 55 578020 4 5729 47 11 5736 74 26 575121 20 5745 48 60 5785 75 46 577122 13 5738 49 80 5805 76 53 577823 38 5763 50 47 5772 77 40 576524 74 5799 51 22 5747 78 32 575725 56 5781 52 75 5800 79 48 577326 71 5796 53 66 579127 23 5748 54 41 5766
Menus and Parameters 2-25BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe default sequence (including the case where all frequencies were deleted) is the single lowest available frequency – 5725 MHz."Add Frequencies – Adds discrete hopping frequencies or frequency ranges. Enter a list of frequencies and/or frequency ranges to be added, e.g. 5725-5735, 5740, 5744. Use a comma to separate between entries (no spaces). The allowed entries are from 5725 to 5875 in steps of 1 MHz. "Remove Frequencies - Removes frequencies from the existing list. Enter a list of frequencies and/or frequency ranges to be removed, using the same guidelines as in Add Frequencies above. When a frequency range is removed, all frequencies in the range that are included in the list of frequencies to be used, are removed, including the frequencies that define the range boundaries."Erase All – Erases all the entries from the list. "Scrambling Definition – Defines the method of organizing the selected frequencies to form the actual hopping sequence to be used. Proper organization of the hopping sequence is essential to guarantee minimal cross interference among several collocated AUs that use the same sequence with different Hopping Shift values.#Scrambling Mode – Defines the scrambling mode. The following options are available:•Standard Scrambling – This mode is not recommended for sequences with 7 or more channels. The scrambled basic sequences for 3 to 6 frequencies when using Standard Scrambling are:Table 2-2: Basic Sequences using Standard ScramblingFrequency 1 (index=1) is the lowest frequency in the list of frequencies to be used, frequency 2 is the next frequency and so on.•Manual Scrambling – For customized definition of the hopping sequence, using the Manual Sequence Definition option (see below). •Enhanced Scrambling – Automatically generates hopping sequences using an enhanced algorithm. It is recommended that Enhanced Scrambling rather then Standard Scrambling be used. If the Enhanced Scrambling Mode is selected, the Spanning Factor N (number of channels) Scrambled Basic Sequence (channel indexes)31, 3, 241, 3, 2, 451, 3, 5, 2, 461, 3, 5, 2, 6, 4
2-26 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01parameter (see below) must be configured in the AU. The Enhanced Mode is not suitable for sequences with 6 or less frequencies. If Enhanced Scrambling is selected with sequences that have 6 or less frequencies, than Standard Scrambling is used by default. The scrambled sequence is generated according to the following rules:a.The first channel in the basic scrambled sequence is frequency 1 (Frequency 1 (index=1) is the lowest frequency in the list of frequencies to be used, frequency 2 is the next frequency and so on.)b.The index of each of the other channels is calculated by adding the Spanning Factor to the index of the previous channel. Note that the sequence is cyclic, meaning that adding 1 to the highest index in the sequence (Index=N where N is the number of channels in the sequence) will result in the first channel (Index=1). The scrambled basic sequence can also be calculated using the following formula:Px (j)= {[(j-1)*X]mod(N)}+1Where:X is the Spanning FactorN is the number of channels in the sequence (modulus)J is the sequence indexExample: N=8, X=3P1(5)={[(1-1)*3}mod8}+1=1P2(5)={[(2-1)*3}mod8}+1=6P3(5)={[(3-1)*3}mod8}+1=3P4(5)={[(4-1)*3}mod8}+1=8P5(5)={[(5-1)*3}mod8}+1=5P6(5)={[(6-1)*3}mod8}+1=2P7(5)={[(7-1)*3}mod8}+1=7P8(5)={[(8-1)*3}mod8}+1=4And the basic scrambled sequence is: 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6.#Manual Sequence Definition – Manually defines the hopping sequence, using numbered channel indexes (from 1 to “Number of Hopping Frequencies”). The sequence length must be equal to “Number of Hopping Frequencies” (all the defined frequencies must be used).#Erase Manual Sequence – Erases the manually defined hopping sequence.
Menus and Parameters 2-27BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual#Spanning Factor (AU only) – Defines the Spanning Factor to be used by the Enhanced Scrambling mechanism. The Spanning Factor should be chosen so that the GCD (Greater Common Divisor) of the Spanning Factor and the Number of Hopping Frequencies would be 1 (e.g. for 8 frequencies possible values for the Spanning Factor are 1, 3, 5 and 7). The SU learns the value of the Spanning Factor from the AU during the association process.Use of different spanning factors by non-synchronized neighboring base stations reduces the probability of interference between adjascent sectors.Valid values: 1 to Number of Hopping Frequencies minus 1, provided it meets the GCD requirement as described above.It is not recommended to use spanning factors of 1 and N-1, as they result in hopping on consecutive channel (assuming that the available channels are consecutive). In these cases the advantage of using frequency hopping is not fully utilized, since a narrow band interference may affect several consecutive hops. Spanning factors of 2 and N-2 also result in a relatively poor spread of the hopping frequencies over the available frequency band. Default Value: 1"Show Flexible Hopping Parameters – Displays the following information:#An updated list of the defined sub-bands and discrete frequencies to become effective after the next reset. A sub-band is defined by the first and last hopping frequency in a series of consecutive frequencies, with 3MHz separation between frequencies.#An updated list of all the hopping frequencies to be used after the next reset.#Scrambling Mode#Manual Sequence Definition (if applicable)#Spanning Factor (if applicable. In the SU it will be shown only when operating in the Enhanced Scrambling mode)#The current sequence of operational hopping frequenciesNOTE:During the association process, the SU learns the Scrambling Mode (and the Spanning Factor if applicable) of the AU. If the Scrambling Mode of the AU is different from the one configured for the SU, than after completing the association process the SU will use the Scrambling Mode of the AU.
2-28 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!Hopping Shift –Displays the current Hopping Shift parameter and allows entry of a new value. Available only in AUs. All the associated SUs learn the value of the Hopping Shift parameter from the AU during the association process. The Hopping Shift parameter is used to provide different operational hopping sequences when several co-located Access Units use the same set of hopping frequencies and the same scrambling method (and hence the same basic hopping sequence). Correct selection of different hopping shift values for adjascent AUs will minimize the cross interference among these AUs and will allow for better spectrum utilization.When setting this parameter, consider the following relationship:Max. Hopping Shift (channels) = Number of hopping frequencies-1.The method of using the Hopping Shift for generating the actual hopping sequences depends on the method used for defining the basic hopping sequence: ISM Standard Sequence, Standard Scrambling, Enhanced Scrambling or Manual Sequence Definition."ISM Hopping Sequence:If ISM US FCC or ISM International hopping standard is used, the shift operation is performed on the channels (frequencies) of the basic hopping sequence. The actual hopping channel (frequency) is calculating by adding the value of the Hopping Shift to the channel (frequency) of the basic hopping sequence. Note that the sequence is cyclic, meaning that adding 1 to channel 80 which is the highest channel, will result in channel 2 which is the lowest channel in the sequence. See Table 2-3 for an example of the actual hopping sequence with a hopping shift of 3.When using the ISM hopping standard, it is recommended that the difference in the values of the hopping shifts used by the units in any two adjacent sectors will be 3 (e.g. 0, 3, 6, …) to minimize cross interference.
Menus and Parameters 2-29BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 2-3: ISM Hopping Sequence, Hopping Shift=3"Enhanced Scrambling mode: In this mode the shift operation is performed on the channel indexes. The actual hopping channel is calculated by increasing the indexes of the basic hopping sequence by the value of the Hopping Shift. Note that the sequence is cyclic, meaning that adding 1 to the highest index in the sequence Index Channel#Frequency(MHz) Index Channel#Frequency(MHz) Index Channel#Frequency(MHz)1 5 5730 28 8 5733 55 18 57432 28 5753 29 42 5767 56 38 57633 67 5792 30 15 5740 57 70 57954 13 5738 31 39 5764 58 55 57805 48 5773 32 71 5796 59 61 57866 21 5746 33 12 5737 60 47 57727 76 5801 34 73 5798 61 53 57788 52 5777 35 80 5805 62 20 57459 24 5749 36 9 5734 63 10 573510 66 5791 37 65 5790 64 22 574711 2 5727 38 32 5757 65 11 573612 34 5759 39 17 5742 66 72 579713 64 5789 40 30 5755 67 54 577914 27 5752 41 19 5744 68 45 577015 57 5782 42 62 5787 69 6 573116 68 5793 43 46 5771 70 33 575817 31 5756 44 79 5804 71 60 578518 3 5728 45 37 5762 72 40 576519 36 5761 46 75 5800 73 58 578320 7 5732 47 14 5739 74 29 575421 23 5748 48 63 5788 75 49 577422 16 5741 49 4 5729 76 56 578123 41 5766 50 50 5775 77 43 576824 77 5802 51 25 5750 78 35 576025 59 5784 52 78 5803 79 51 577626 74 5799 53 69 579427 26 5751 54 44 5769
2-30 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01(Index=N where N is the number of channels in the sequence) will result in the first channel (Index=1). Example: Enhanced Scrambling, N=8, Spanning Factor=3:Table 2-4: Hopping Shift Implementation, Enhanced Scrambling (N=8, Spanning Factor=3)If for example the defined hopping frequencies are 5730, 5740, 5750, 5760, 5770, 5780, 5790, 5800, then the frequencies of the actual hopping sequences are:Table 2-5: Actual Hopping sequences, Enhanced Scrambling (N=8, Spanning Factor=3)The following formula can be used for calculating the actual hopping sequence: PS(j)={[P0(j)+S-1]mod(N)}+1 Where:S=Hopping ShiftHopping Shift Actual Sequence Indexes0 (basic sequence) 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 612, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1, 4, 723, 6, 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 834, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6, 145, 8, 3, 6, 1, 4, 7, 256, 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 367, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1, 478, 3, 6, 1, 4, 7, 2, 5Hopping Shift Hop#1 Hop#2 Hop#3 Hop#4 Hop#5 Hop#6 Hop#7 Hop#805730 5760 5790 5740 5770 5800 5750 578015740 5770 5800 5750 5780 5730 5760 579025750 5780 5730 5760 5790 5740 5770 580035760 5790 5740 5770 5800 5750 5780 573045770 5800 5750 5780 5730 5760 5790 574055780 5730 5760 5790 5740 5770 5800 575065790 5740 5770 5800 5750 5780 5730 576075800 5750 5780 5730 5760 5790 5740 5770
Menus and Parameters 2-31BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualN=number of channels in the sequence (modulus)P0(j)=Channel no. j in the basic sequence (shift=0)PS(j)=Channel no. j in the actual sequence with hopping shift SExample: The basic hopping sequence is 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6 (Enhanced Scrambling, N=8, Spanning Factor=3).The actual hopping sequence for a hopping shift of 3 is:P3(1)=[1+3-1]mod8+1=4P3(2)=[4+3-1]mod8+1=7P3(3)=[7+3-1]mod8+1=2P3(4)=[2+3-1]mod8+1=5P3(5)=[5+3-1]mod8+1=8P3(6)=[8+3-1]mod8+1=3P3(7)=[3+3-1]mod8+1=6P3(8)=[6+3-1]mod8+1=1The actual hopping sequence indexes are: 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1Standard and Manual Scrambling:In these modes the shift operation is performed on the sequence elements. The basic sequence is shifted cyclically according to the value of the Hopping Shift parameter, so that element no. i in the actual sequence equals element number i+s in the basic sequence, where s is the hopping shift. Thus, if the basic sequence is a, b, c, d, e, f then a shift of 1 will result in the sequence b, c, d, e, f, a,; a shift of 2 will result in the sequence c, d, e, f, a, b; and so forth. Example: Standard Scrambling, N=6Table 2-6: Hopping Shift Implementation, Standard Scrambling (N=6)If the defined frequencies are 5730, 5740, 5750, 5760, 5770, 5780, then the frequencies of the actual hopping sequences are:Hopping Shift Actual Sequence0 (basic sequence) 1, 3, 5, 2, 6, 413, 5, 2, 6, 4, 125, 2, 6, 4, 1, 332, 6, 4, 1, 3, 546, 4, 1, 3, 5, 254, 1, 3, 5, 2, 6
2-32 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Table 2-7: Actual Hopping sequences, Standard Scrambling (N=6)The following formula can be used to calculate the actual hopping sequence:P S(i)=P0[(i+s-1)mod(N)+1]Where:S is the hopping shiftN=number of channels in the sequence (modulus)P S(i) is element number i in the actual sequence with hopping shift sP0(i) is element number in the basic hopping sequence (s=0).For example, in the basic sequence sequence with N=6:P0(1) =1P0 (2)=3P0 (3)=5P0 (4)=2P0 (5)=6P0 (6)=4For a shift of 3, the actual sequence is:P3(1) =P0 [(1+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(4)=2P3(2) =P0 [(2+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(5)=6P3(3) =P0 [(3+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(6)=4P3(4) =P0 [(4+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(1)=1P3(5) =P0 [(5+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(2)=3P3(6) =P0 [(6+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(3)=5And the actual hopping sequence is 2, 6, 4, 1, 3, 5.The allowed range for the Hopping shift parameter is from 0 to N-1, where N is the number of hopping frequencies. The default is 0.Hopping shift Hop#1 Hop#2 Hop#3 Hop#4 Hop#5 Hop#605730 5750 5770 5740 5780 576015750 5770 5740 5780 5760 573025770 5740 5780 5760 5730 575035740 5780 5760 5730 5750 577045780 5760 5730 5750 5770 574055760 5730 5750 5770 5740 5780
Menus and Parameters 2-33BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!Hopping Sync (BS-AU only) –Displays the current Hopping Sync status of the unit and allows defining a new status. When several AUs that use the same hopping set and different hopping sequences are co-located, their operation should be synchronized in terms of hopping sequence initialization and timing. If a BS-GU GPS module is not used for synchronization, then one AU must be specified as a Master unit and all other units must be specified as Slave units. When a BS-GU is used, all AUs must be configured to Slave mode. Available options are: "Idle – No synchronization (stand-alone operation)"Master – The AU that serves as a Master unit providing synchronization signals to the Slave units"Slave – An AU that operates as a SlaveThe default is Idle. ESSID ParametersThe ESSID is a string used to identify a wireless network. It prevents the unintentional merging of two co-located wireless networks. An SU can only associate with an AU that has an identical ESSID. To facilitate easy additions of SUs to existing deployments, where different ESSIDs are used in neighboring sectors, a secondary “global” ESSID, namely Operator ESSID, is available in the AU.!ESSID – The ESSID (Extended Service Set ID) of the unit. Use different ESSIDs to segment the wireless access network and add security to your network.Valid values: A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case sensitive.The default value is ESSID1. !Operator ESSID Parameters (AU only) – The Operator ESSID is a secondary ESSID that can only be configured in the AU. The Operator ESSID can be used to enhance flexibility and reduce configuration effort when adding new Subscriber Units to operational installations in which different ESSIDs were configured for different sectors that actually belong to the same network. In such installations, all AUs should be configured with the same NOTE:Synchronization is not allowed by the radio regulations in certain countries. In units using the ISM US FCC hopping standard, the Hopping Sync option is not supported. WARNING:When using a GPS system for synchronization, all AUs in the chassis must be set to Slave.
2-34 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Operator ESSID. The ESSID as well as the Operator ESSID are included in the AU’s Beacon & Probe Response management frames. The SU shall regard such frames if the ESSID or Operator ESSID matches its own ESSID. The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is associated is defined as the Run-Time ESSID, to be used by the SU when communicating with the AU. The Run-Time ESSID is included in the list displayed upon selecting either Show Air Interface Parameters or Show Basic Parameters options in the SU. In new installations where all units are configured with the same ESSID, Operator ESSID need not be used.The following parameters are available:"Operator ESSID Option – Enables/disables the use of the Operator ESSID when communicating with SUs.The default is Enable."Operator ESSID – Defines the Operator ESSID.Valid values: a string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case sensitive.The default value is ESSID1. Best AU Selection Parameters In BreezeACCESS systems with software version 3.0 and below an SU can associate with any AU it can communicate with, provided they both use the same ESSID. An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID becomes associated with the first AU it “finds”, not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication or other factors such as number of SUs serviced by each AU. The same limitation also exists if only one AU in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU, since it is not always necessarily the best choice. The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing. Changes in base station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance. The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU feature, to enable a SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood. When the Best AU feature is used, each of the AUs are given a quality mark based on the level at which it is received by the SU. The SU scans for a configured number of cycles, gathering information from all the AUs it can communicate with. At the end of the scanning period, the SU reachs a Best AU decision according to the information gathered. The AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU will immediately try to associate with it.The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received by the SU.
Menus and Parameters 2-35BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as the preferred AU.!Best AU Parameters in SU "Best AU Support – Enables or disables the Best AU selection feature. The default is Disable. "Number of Scanning Attempts – Defines the number of scanning cycles to be used for gathering information on neighboring AUs. A higher number may result in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the SU is not operational.Valid values: 1 - 255.Default value: 20.The scanning time can be calculated based on the following formula:Scanning Time (secs) = N * C * 0.019N = Number of scanning attemptsC = Number of channels in the hopping sequence 0.019 seconds is the time spent on each channel (dwell time) while in scanning mode."Preferred AU MAC Address – Defines a specific AU with which the SU should associate. Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in network management. The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with whom the SU should associate. To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it finds, the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled. Once the SU has identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address, it will associate with it and terminate the scanning process. If the preferred AU is not found, the SU will associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU algorithm.NOTE:Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long-term conditions prior to the decision time, it may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time. Note also that the decision is done only once during the scanning interval. The decision may not remain the optimal one for ever. If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served by them, overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to re-initiate the Best AU decision process.NOTE:If the Best AU feature is not used, the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID.
2-36 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Valid values: MAC address stringThe default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00-00-00-00-00-00 (12 zeros), meaning that there is no preferred AU. "Show Best AU Parameters and Data – Displays the applicable information:#Neighboring AU Data table - Displayed for each AU that the unit can communicate with the following parameters:•MAC Address•Received signal strength – RSSI or dBm •Mark – The computed quality mark for the AU.•Full – The association load status of the AU. It is defined as full if the number of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter (see page 2-38). An AU whose associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU, even if its’ computed mark is the highest.•ESSID – The ESSID of the AU In addition to the neighboring AU data table, the following information is displayed:•Best AU Support•Preferred AU MAC Address•Number of Scanning Attempts•Associated AU MAC Address (the MAC address of the selected AU) •Run Time ESSID (the ESSID of the selected AU)Power Control Parameters!Transmit Power Control – Controls the relative gain of the Tx power circuits. A value of 7 represents the highest transmit power level, which is the maximum level supported by the specific unit. A lower value represents a lower transmit power level. The effect of this parameter on the transmitted power is not linear, since it is affected by the length (attenuation) of the IF cable.The allowed range is from 0 to 7. The default value is 7 (maximum power). Other Air Interface Parameters !Maximum Data Rate – Displays the current maximum data rate, and allows entry of a new value for the maximum data rate.NOTE:It is recommended not to change the Transmit Power Control parameter from its default value in units with HW revision G or earlier.
Menus and Parameters 2-37BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualBreezeACCESS units operate at data rates of 3 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps. Under certain conditions (compatibility reasons or range/speed trade-off), you may decide to limit the use of higher rates. If the quality of the link is not good enough, it is recommended to decrease the value of this parameter (the higher the data rate, the higher the error rate). Otherwise, there is a high probability that the unit will have to retransmit many frames several times before temporarily reducing the data rate (see Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate on page 2-56). A high number of retransmissions reduces the overall throughput for the selected SU as well as for all the other SUs served by the same AU. It is recommended to also configure the Maximum Data Rate parameter when the Multi-Rate mechanism is enabled, to avoid unnecessary trials to transmit at higher rates when the probability of successful transmissions at these rates is low.The link quality can be estimated based on the RSSI measurement in the SU, indicating the level at which the SU receives transmissions from the AU (downlink RSSI). If the measured RSSI is less than a certain threshold, it is recommended to decrease the Maximum Data Rate of the SU in accordance with Table 2-8 (including a 3 dB safety margin). For best results it is recommended to also acquire the RSSI results from the AU, indicating the level at which the AU receives transmissions from the specific SU (uplink RSSI), and to use the lower of the two numbers.The AU learns the Maximum Data Rate used by each SU during the association process, and uses this rate for transmissions to the specific SU. Allowed values are 1, 2, 3 Mbps.The default value is 3 Mbps.
2-38 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Table 2-8: Recommended Maximum Data Rate!Acknowledge Delay Limit – Increases the range of the system through increasing the time that the unit can wait for acknowledgements. Increasing the range, however, may decrease the overall performance and achievable network throughput. It should be increased only to support ranges of over 10 km. If the range was increased for one SU, it must be increased to the same value for the AU. Valid values are: Low (up to 10 km), Medium (up to 20 km) and High (more than 20 km).The default setting is Low (up to 10 km).!Maximum Number of Associations – Defines the upper limit for the number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the AU, in order to guarantee the required quality of service to the customers. Valid values: 0-512. Default value: 512.!WLAN Aging Time (AU only)– Displays the current Call Aging Time parameter value and configures a new value. The AU maintains a Call Information database that includes listings of the SUs that are currently conducting a voice call. This database is used to determine the number of active voice calls that are managed by the AU at any given moment, allowing control of the number of simultaneous voice calls (see Maximum Voice Sessions parameters). In addition, the AU allocates prioritized channels to the voice (RTP) packets of SUs included in the Call Information database.Maximum Data Rate 3Mbps 2Mbps 1MbpsSU-A/E RSSI>-67 dBm -75 dBm<RSSI<-67 dBm RSSI<-75 dBmNOTE:There is no aging time for SUs. An SU will be removed from the list of associated SUs only upon occurrence of any of the following: (1) The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU, or (2) The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it. Thus, the database of associated SUs may include units that are no longer associated with the AU. If the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter, additional SUs can not be served by this AU. To view the current number of associated SUs, use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu. To delete entries of SUs that are no longer active, the AU must be reset.
Menus and Parameters 2-39BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe SU is deleted from the Call Information database once it sends a message that the call was terminated. Throughout the voice call, the SU periodically transmits keep-alive (re-association) messages approximatly every ten minutes indicating that the call is still on. If such messages are not received for a period defined by the Call Aging Time parameter, the following will take place.a. The AU deletes the SU listing from the Call Information database assuming that the call was improperly terminated (e.g. reset or loss of synchronization). b. For non-ACSE voice calls, a prioritized channel is no longer allocated to the voice packets (although voice packets will still get a relatively high priority).c. ACSE voice calls will be terminated (no slot will be allocated for the call).The allowed range for the Call Aging Time parameter is 1 (no aging) or 2-50,000 seconds. It is recommended to configure a call aging time of at least 1200 (20 minutes). The default value is 1800 seconds.!Maximum Voice Sessions – Applicable only for an AU that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities. When the ACSE voice scheduler option is enabled, this parameter is not applicable and instead the Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions parameter is used. The value of the Maximum Voice Sessions parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous voice sessions that can be conducted by the SUs associated with this AU. If the number of active voice sessions reaches this number, any additional SU trying to initiate a voice session shall not get a dial tone. As this value increases, voice quality may deteriorate as more users share the same bandwidth for voice sessions. The selection range is from 0 to 50. The default value is 12.!Receive Attenuation Control (SU-A/E units) – Displays the current attenuation introduced into the receiver circuits and allows entry of a different attenuation value. The available Receive Attenuation values are 0 dB (no attenuation), 10 dB and 25 dB. The effect of inserting such attenuation in the receive circuit is equivalent to reducing the level of the received signal (including both signal and noise) by 2 dB when selecting 10 dB attenuation and 12 dB when selecting 25 dB attenuation.The default is 0 dB.NOTE:A voice session is defined as a voice connection between an SU and an AU. A session between two SUs that are served by the same AU is counted as two voice sessions.
2-40 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!ACSE Parameters – The ACSE (Adaptive Circuit Switched Emulation) Voice Scheduler is a proprietary enhanced air protocol that provides guaranteed delay and jitter properties for voice sessions by reserving specific time slots for each active telephone call. The ACSE Voice Scheduler allows the delivery of high quality voice, while maintaining the inherent efficiency of statistically multiplexed packet based networks. If the ACSE Voice Scheduler is enabled, an AU can support a higher number of good quality voice sessions. The ACSE Voice Scheduler feature does not affect voice sessions generated by external equipment and routed via the Ethernet port of the Subscriber Unit. "ACSE Option – Applicable only for an AU that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities. To enable/disable the ACSE Voice Scheduler protocol. The AU controls the operation of all the SUs it serves according to the configured ACSE Option.The default is Disable."Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions – Applicable only for an AU that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities. When the ACSE voice scheduler option is disabled, this parameter is not applicable and instead the Maximum Voice Sessions parameter (see page 2-39) is used. The value of the ACSE Maximum Voice Sessions parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous ACSE voice sessions that can be conducted by the SUs associated with this AU. If the number of active voice sessions reaches this number, any additional SU trying to initiate a voice session will not get a dial tone. As this value increases, voice quality may deteriorate as more users share the same bandwidth for voice sessions. The selection range is from 0 to 21. The default value is 21."ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data – The maximum number of times that a data packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted. When the ACSE Option is enabled, this parameter overrides the Number Of Retransmissions parameter (see page 2-55). This parameter has no effect when the ACSE Option is disabled. This parameter is applicable to all units in deployment where the ACSE Option is enabled, including units that do not support voice, since they are also affected by the use of the ACSE protocol. NOTE:A voice session is defined as a voice connection between an SU and an AU. A session between two SUs that are served by the same AU is counted as two voice sessions.
Menus and Parameters 2-41BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualValid values are from 0 (no retransmissions) to 100. The default value is 6."ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice (AU and SU with voice support) – The maximum number of times that a voice packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted. When the ACSE Option is enabled, this parameter overrides the Number Of Retransmissions parameter. This parameter has no effect when the ACSE Option is disabled.Valid values are from 0 (no retransmissions) to 100. The default value is 30."Show ACSE Parameters – Displays the current settings of all ACSE parameters. The display in the SU includes the ACSE Option, which is only configurable in the AU. It also includes the ACSE Dwell Time, which is set to 60 milliseconds.Network Management Parameters (AU, SU and GU)This feature allows protecting the unit from trials of unauthorized access by defining a set of IP addresses from which management of the unit (Telnet, TFTP, SNMP, ICMP) is allowed (excluding transmission of messages generated in the unit such as Traps or Ping Test frames). This feature also supports the possibility of defining the direction (from the wireless media or from the wired Ethernet or from both) from which such access is allowed. The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options:!Access to Network Management – Defines the port through which the unit can be managed. The options are the following:"From Wlan Only"From Ethernet Only"From Both Ethernet & WlanThe default selection is From Both Ethernet & Wlan.!Network Management Filtering – Enables/disables management filtering. If management filtering is enabled, the unit can only be managed by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses (see next parameter) that are connected to the unit via the defined port(s). Available options are:NOTE:The Access to Network Management option is not available in the GU, as this module does not have a wireless link interface.
2-42 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01"Disable – No IP address based filtering"Activate Management IP Filter On Ethernet Port – Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From Both Ethernet & Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from the Ethernet port only by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses list. If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet & Wireless Link, than there is no IP address based filtering on the wireless port."Activate Management IP Filter On Wlan Port – Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link Only or From Both Ethernet & Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from the wireless link port only by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses list. If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet & Wireless Link, then there is no IP-address-based filtering on the Ethernet port."Activate Management IP Filter On Both Ethernet & Wlan Ports – Applicable with all options of the Access to Network Management parameter. The unit can be managed from the port(s) defined by the selected option of the Access to Network Management parameter only by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses list.The default selection is Disable.!Set Network Management IP Addresses – Displays the IP addresses of the stations that can manage the unit (if Network Management Filtering option was enabled) and allows you to enter new addresses; up to three IP addresses can be defined. The default value is 000.000.000.000 for all 3 addresses.!Delete a Network Management IP Address – Deletes one of the 3 IP address entries from the list of Network Management IP Addresses.!Delete All Network Management IP Addresses – Deletes all entries from the list of Network Management IP Addresses.!SNMP Traps – Enables/disables transmission of SNMP traps; if this option is enabled, you can define up to 3 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent.NOTE:In the GU only the Disable and Enable Management IP Filtering on Ethernet Port options are available.
Menus and Parameters 2-43BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual"Send SNMP Traps – Enables/disables sending of SNMP traps. Available options are:#Enable Traps Sending#Disable Traps SendingThe default selection is Disable Traps Sending."SNMP Traps IP Destination – Displays the current values of 3 IP addresses that are defined as the trap destinations. Allows entering a new address (4 groups of 3 digits each, separated by dots) for each of the 3 entries.The default of all three SNMP Traps IP Destinations is 000.000.000.000."SNMP Traps Community – Defines a new community string for each of the 3 SNMP Trap IP Destination entries.Valid strings: Up to 14 ASCII characters, case sensitive. The default for all 3 entries is public (read-only)."Show SNMP Traps Parameters – Displays the current values of the SNMP Traps parameters.!Show Network Management Parameters – Displays the current values of the Network Management parameters.Bridge Parameters (AU, SU and GU)The Bridge Parameters sub-menu includes the following parameters sets:!Virtual LAN (VLAN) parameters!ToS parameters!Ethernet Broadcast Filtering parameters!Other Bridging parametersVLAN Parameters!VLAN Support – Defines the parameters that are related to the VLAN-aware (Virtual LAN-aware) feature of BreezeACCESS units. Each VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other, but cannot communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs. The VLAN also provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames. The information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header, which is inserted in each frame between the MAC header and the data. VLAN implementation in BreezeACCESS units supports frames routing by port information (i.e. each port is connected to only one VLAN). The VLAN Support option allows viewing and setting of the following parameters:
2-44 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01"VLAN ID-Data (SU unit only) – Applicable for Access links only. Sets the VLAN ID for data frames, identifying the VLAN to which the unit belongs. Valid values: 1 to 4094. Default value: 1.Frames received from the Wireless link port: • Only tagged frames with VLAN ID (VID) value equal to the VLAN ID Data defined in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port.• The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless link prior to transmitting them on the Ethernet port.Frames received from the Ethernet port:• A VLAN data tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the Ethernet port before transmission on the wireless link. The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID – Data and the VLAN Priority – Data parameters.• Tagged frames received on Ethernet port which are designed to be forwarded to the Wireless link port are discarded (including frames with priority tag for prioritization purpose only)."VLAN ID-Management (AU, SU without voice and GU) – Applicable for all link types. Sets the VLAN ID for management frames, identifying remote stations for management purposes. This applies to all management applications using protocols such as SNMP, TFTP, ICMP (ping) and Telnet. All the servers/stations using these protocols must tag the management frames they send to the unit with the value of the VLAN ID – Management parameter. Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN). Default value: 65535.If VLAN ID – Management is other than 65535:• Only tagged management frames with matching VLAN ID received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit. • A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID – Management and the VLAN Priority – Management parameters.If VLAN ID – Management is 65535 (No VLAN): • Only untagged management frames received on either Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit. • Management frames generated by the unit will not be tagged.
Menus and Parameters 2-45BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID – Management parameter. The table is valid for all link types.Table 2-9: Management Port Functionality – AU, SU without Voice Support and GULegend: VID-M: VLAN ID-Management PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management"VLAN ID-Voice & Management (SU with voice support only) – Applicable for all link types. Sets the VLAN ID for voice and management frames, identifying remote stations for voice communication and management purposes. This applies to all units that support the H.323 protocol and to management applications using protocols such SNMP, TFTP, ICMP (Ping) and Telnet. All the servers/stations using these protocols must tag the frames they send to the unit with the value of the VLAN ID - Voice & Management parameter. Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN). Default value: 65535.If VLAN ID –Voice & Management is other than 65535:• Only tagged management frames with matching VLAN ID received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit. • A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID – Voice & Management and the VLAN Priority – Management parameters. • A VLAN Voice Tag is inserted in all voice frames (RTP packets) generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port. The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID – Voice & Management and the VLAN Priority – Voice parameters.If VLAN ID – Voice & Management is 65535 (No VLAN):• Only untagged management frames received on either Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit. • Management frames generated by the unit will not be tagged. Action Management Port – internal (SU)Receive from Ethernet Tagged frames, matching VID-MUntagged frames when VID-M=65535Receive from Wireless(AU and SU) Tagged frames, matching VID-MUntagged frames when VID-M=65535Transmit Tag Insert VID-M, PID-M
2-46 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01•If the Voice Priority Tag Option is enabled, a VLAN Priority Tag is inserted in all voice frames (RTP packets) generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port. The tag includes a VID value of zero and the VLAN Priority – Voice parameter.The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management and voice ports in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID – Voice & Management parameter. The table is valid for all link types. See VLAN Link type – Access Link and Trunk Link for some restrictions when configuring this parameter.Table 2-10: Management and Voice Ports Functionality – SU with Voice SupportLegend: VID-M: VLAN ID - Voice and Management PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management PID-V: VLAN Priority-Voice"VLAN Link Type (AU and SU) – Defines the link type, which actually defines the functionality of the VLAN-aware capability of the unit. Available options are: Hybrid Link, Trunk Link and Access Link (Access Link is available only in SUs). The default selection is Hybrid Link.#Access Link (SU only) – Transfers frames while tagging/untagging them because all devices connected to it are VLAN-unaware. Thus, the unit cannot transfer tagged frames.The following table summarizes the functionality of the data port for an access link.Action Management Port – internal (SU) Voice RTP Port – internal(SU with Voice)Receive from Ethernet Tagged frames, matching VID-MUntagged frames when VID-M=65535Not applicableReceive from Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-MUntagged frames whenVID-M=65535Tagged frames, matching VID-MUntagged frames when VID-M=65535Transmit Tag Insert VID-M, PID-M If VID-M = 65535 and Voice Priority Tag option are enabled, Tag insert VID=0, PID-V.If VID-M not equal to 65535, insert VID-M and PID-V
Menus and Parameters 2-47BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 2-11: VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary – Access LinkLegend: VID-D: VLAN ID-Data PID-D: VLAN Priority-Data#Trunk Link – Transfers only tagged frames, because all devices connected to it are VLAN-aware:Only tagged data frames received on Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded. If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a received data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit’s VLAN Forwarding List will be discarded. If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU, a WLAN relayed data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit’s VLAN Relaying List will be discarded. The following table summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link.Action Data Port (SU)Accept from Ethernet Untagged framesAccept from Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-D Tag Insert VID-D, PID-D (to wireless)Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet)WARNING:It is not recommended to configure a unit as a Trunk Link with VLAN ID - Management (or VLAN ID - Voice & Management) of 65535, as it will not forward any ‘NO VLAN’ management frames to its other port. It will be impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured with ‘NO VLAN’.NOTE:If VLAN Forwarding is enabled, make sure to include in the Forwarding List the VLAN ID – Management (or VLAN ID - Voice & Management) of all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit. NOTE:If VLAN Relaying is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit, make sure to include in the Relaying List the VLAN ID – Management (or VLAN ID - Management & Voice) of all units that should be managed when relaying via the wireless port of the AU unit. If also VLAN Forwarding is enabled in the AU, these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List.
2-48 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Table 2-12: VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary – Trunk Link#Hybrid Link – Transfers both tagged and untagged frames, since the devices connected to it can be either VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware. This is equivalent to defining no VLAN support, as the unit is transparent to VLAN.The following table summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Hybrid link:Table 2-13: VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary– Hybrid Link"Voice Priority Tag Option (SU with voice support only) –. Supports priority for voice frames (RTP packets) in units with VLAN ID – Management & Voice of 65535 (No VLAN). If enabled, a Priority Tag that includes the value of the VLAN Priority – Voice parameter and a zero value in the VID field will be inserted into all voice frames (RTP packets) generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port. Valid selections are: Enable and Disable. Default selection is Disable."VLAN Forwarding (AU and SU)– Applicable for trunk link only. Defines the VLAN ID values that will be included in the VLAN Forwarding List. If the VLAN Link Type is defined as a Action Data Port (SU and AU)Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames.If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list are forwarded. Accept from Wireless Tagged frames.If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list are forwarded.Tag Insert NoTag Remove NoAction Data Port(SU and AU)Accept from Ethernet All Accept from Wireless All Tag Insert No Tag Remove No
Menus and Parameters 2-49BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTrunk Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a received data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit’s VLAN Forwarding List will be discarded. The VLAN Forwarding parameter provides the following options:#VLAN Forwarding Support – Enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding feature. Available selections are Disable and Enable. The default selection is Disable.#Add Forwarding VLAN ID – Adds a VLAN ID to the VLAN Forwarding List. One VLAN ID can be entered each time. The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20. Valid values are 1 to 4094.#Remove Forwarding VLAN ID – Removes a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Forwarding List.Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List.#Show VLAN ID Forwarding List – Displays the values of the VLAN IDs that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List."VLAN Relaying (AU only) – Applicable for Trunk link only. Defines the VLAN ID values that will be included in the VLAN Relaying List. If the Link Type is defined as Trunk Link and the VLAN Relaying option is enabled, a received wireless link relayed frame (a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted back through the wireless link) with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit’s VLAN Relaying List, will be discarded. If VLAN Forwarding Support is also enabled, it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation. The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options:#VLAN Relaying Support – Enables or disables the VLAN Relaying feature. Available selections are Disable and Enable. The default selection is Disable.#Add Relaying VLAN ID – Adds a VLAN ID to the VLAN Relaying List. One VLAN ID can be entered each time. NOTE:If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is enabled, then all data frames will be discarded.
2-50 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying List is 20. Valid values are 1 to 4094.#Remove Relaying VLAN ID – Removes a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Relaying List. Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are included in the VLAN Relaying List.#Show VLAN ID Relaying List – Displays the values of the VLAN IDs that are included in the VLAN Relaying List."VLAN Traffic Priority (AU and SU) – Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three queues: Low, Mid and High. Packets in the High queue have the highest priority for transmission, and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority. BreezeACCESS Subscriber and Access Units support Layer 2 traffic prioritization based on the IEEE 802.1p standard. The priority field in the 802.1Q header tag can have a value in the range 0-7. This value determines the relative priority of the packet. Tagged frames that are received from the Ethernet port and have a Priority higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold will be routed to the Mid queue. As the system also supports Layer 3 prioritization based on ToS, packets with precedence in the ToS field that is higher than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter will also be routed to the Mid queue (applicable to both tagged and untagged frames). All other packets received from the Ethernet port will be routed to the Low queue.Voice frames (RTP packets) generated by SUs with voice support as well as control and wireless management frames that are generated in the unit will be routed to the High queue.Any frame coming from the Ethernet port which is designed to reach another BreezeACCESS unit via the wireless port will be sent to the High queue, regardless of the configured Priority options.NOTE:If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is enabled, then all wireless link relayed data frames will be discarded.If the VLAN ID Relaying List and Forwarding List Support are both enabled, all the VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
Menus and Parameters 2-51BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe VLAN Traffic Priority menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters:#VLAN Priority – Data (SU only) – Applicable for Access link only. Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames that are transmitted to the wireless link. All data frames are routed to the Low queue. This parameter will only impact the way that other VLAN-aware devices will handle the packet. Valid values are 0-7. The default value is 0.#VLAN Priority – Management (AU, SU and GU)– Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for management frames in units with a VLAN ID- Management (or VLAN ID – Management & Voice) value other than 65535. In the unit all management frames are routed to the High queue. This parameter only impacts the way that other VLAN-aware devices will handle the packet. Valid values are 0-7. The default value is 4 for SU units with voice support and 0 for all other units.#VLAN Priority – Voice (SU with voice support only) – Applicable for all link types. Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for voice frames (RTP packets). In the unit all voice frames (RTP packets) are routed to the High queue. This parameter only impacts the way that other VLAN-aware devices will handle the packet. In units with VLAN ID – Voice & Management of 65535 (No VLAN), if the Voice Priority Tag Option enabled, then a Priority Tag that includes the value of the VLAN Priority – Voice parameter and a zero value in the VID field will be inserted into all voice frames (RTP packets) generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port. Valid values are 0-7. The default value is 6.#VLAN Priority Threshold (AU and SU) – Applicable for trunk and hybrid links only. Displays and defines the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold. This parameter impacts the way that the unit will handle tagged packets that are received from the Ethernet port.NOTE:Packets Received from the Ethernet port with a ToS Precedence value higher than the ToS Precedence Threshold defined will be routed to the Mid queue.
2-52 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Since the system supports both Layer 2 and Layer 3 prioritization, a frame will be routed to the Mid queue if one of the following conditions is met:a. The precedence in the ToS field is higher than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter (applicable to both tagged and untagged frames).b. The VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter.Valid values are 0-7. The default value is 4."Show VLAN Parameters – Displays the current values of the VLAN Support parameters.ToS Priority Parameters (AU and SU)!ToS Priority – To set voice priority parameters to support end-to-end IPv4 Type of Service (ToS) Layer 3 prioritization according to RFC 791. The ToS Priority menu includes the following parameters:"Voice Packets ToS (SU with voice support only) – Sets the value of the Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header of voice frames (RTP packets). If the router/gateway in the base stations supports quality of service based on IPv4 ToS, the value of this parameters should be configured according to the definitions of the router/gateway in order to take advantage of the QoS feature and to ensure that voice packets will be handled accordingly. Valid values are 0-255. The default value is 0."ToS Precedence Threshold (AU and SU) – ToS based prioritization is in accordance with the precedence bits of the ToS field in the IP header. An IP packet received from the Ethernet port will be routed to the Mid queue if one of the following conditions is met:a.The precedence in the ToS field is higher than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter (applicable to both tagged and untagged frames).b. The VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame (hybrid or trunk link) is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter. All other packets received from the Ethernet port will be routed to the Low queue.Valid values are 0 to 7.The default value is 3.
Menus and Parameters 2-53BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualEthernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only) Allows defining the Layer 2 (Ethernet) broadcast and multicast filtering capability. The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering allows enhancing the security of the system and saving bandwidth on the wireless media through blocking protocols that are typically used in the customer’s LAN but are not relevant for other customers (e.g. NetBios that is used by Microsoft Network Neighborhood). Enabling this feature blocks Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts (the I/G bit at the destination address is set to 1). This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind the SU.The Ethernet Broadcasting Filtering menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters:!Filter Options – Defines the Ethernet broadcast filtering functionality of the unit. The following options are available:"Disable: No Ethernet broadcast filtering"From Ethernet Only: Filter broadcast messages received from the Ethernet port"From WLAN Only: Filter broadcast messages received from the wireless link port"Both From Ethernet & WLAN: Filter broadcast messages received from both the Ethernet port and the wireless link portThe default selection is Disable.!DHCP Broadcast Override Filter – Enables broadcasting of DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) messages. This is independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above, meaning that even if according to the selected filtering option, broadcast messages should be filtered, DHCP broadcasts will be transmitted if the Enable DHCP Broadcast option is selected. Available selections are:"Disable– DHCP Broadcast messages will be filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by the selected value of the Filter Options parameter. "Enable– DHCP Broadcast messages will be transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter. The default selection is Disable.!PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter – Enables broadcasting of PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) messages. This is independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above, meaning that even if according to the selected filtering option broadcast messages should be filtered, PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if the Enable PPPoE Broadcast option is selected.Available selections are:
2-54 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01"Disable– PPPoE Broadcast messages is filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by the selected value of the Filter Options parameter."Enable– PPPoE Broadcast messages is transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter. The default selection is Disable.!ARP Broadcast Override Filter –When this option is set to Enable ARP Broadcast, broadcasting of ARP messages is independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above. This means that ARP broadcasts are transmitted regardless of which filtering option is selected for broadcast messages.Available selections are:"Disable– ARP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by the Filter Options parameter."Enable– ARP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter. The default selection is Enable.Other Bridging Parameters!LAN to Wireless Link Bridging Mode (AU only) – Controls the flow of information from the Ethernet backbone to the wireless media. The options are:"Reject Unknown – Allows transmission of packets only to addresses that the AU knows to exist in the wireless link."Forward Unknown – Allows transmission of all packets, except those sent to addresses that the AU recognizes as being on its wired Ethernet side.The default selection is Forward Unknown. !Bridge Aging Time (AU and SU) – Displays the current value for bridge aging time for learned addresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides (not including BreezeACCESS units), and allows entry of a new value.The available range is 100 to 2000 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds for AUs and for SUs with bridge functionality (SU-BD and SU-BD1V). For all other SUs it is 1800 seconds. !Broadcast Relaying (AU only) – Determines whether the unit performs broadcast relaying. When Broadcast Relaying is enabled, broadcast packets originating in devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the wired LAN. If disabled, these packets are sent only to the local
Menus and Parameters 2-55BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manualwired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link. Disable Broadcast Relaying if you are sure that all broadcast messages from the wireless link will be destined to the wired LAN. The default selection is Enable.!Unicast Relaying (AU only) – Determines whether the unit performs Unicast relaying. When Unicast Relaying is enabled, Unicast packets originating in devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices. If this parameter is disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link. Disable Unicast Relaying only if you know that all unicast messages from the wireless link will be destined to the local wired LAN. The default selection is Enable. !Show Bridge Parameters – Displays the current values of the Bridge parameters.Performance Parameters (AU and SU)The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:!RTS Threshold – Defines the minimal frame size to require RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshake. Frames with a size below the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link without being preceded with RTS frames. Setting this parameter to a value larger than the maximum frame size will prevent the RTS/CTS handshake for frames transmitted by this unit. The allowed range is from 20 to 1600. The default value is 60 bytes for SUs and 1600 for AUs.!Number of Retransmissions – The maximum number of times that a packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted. This parameter is not applicable when the ACSE Option is enabled. Valid values are from 0 (no retransmissions) to 100. The default value is 1.!Number of Dwells to Retransmit – The minimum number of dwell periods during which packets will be retransmitted. The Number of Dwells to Retransmit parameter is used together with the Number of Retransmissions parameter (see above) to spread the retransmissions in both the time and frequency domains. Valid values are from 0 to 9. The default value is 2.
2-56 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate – The number of unsuccessful retransmissions that will cause an automatic decrease in the data rate before the next retransmission (the lower the data rate, the higher the probability that the packet will be properly received and acknowledged). Valid values are from 0 to 10. The default value is 0, meaning that the rate will be decreased immediately following an unsuccessful transmission attempt at the current rate.!Minimum Contention Window – The BreezeACCESS system uses a special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal (Carrier Sense Multiple Access-CSMA) and analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate the activity of other SUs served by the same AU. The target is to minimize collisions in the wireless media resulting from trials of more than one unit to transmit at the same time. The contention window is the time that a unit will wait from the time it has decided that there are no transmissions by other units until it will attempt to transmit. The contention window is a random number whose maximum value is determined by the value of the Minimum Contention Window parameter and the number of previous trials to transmit the frame. The higher the number of SUs served by the same AU, the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be. The Valid values are from 7 to 255.The default value is 31. !Carrier Sense Level – This is the threshold level that determines the existence of transmission from another unit on the wireless media. As long as the level is above this threshold, the unit will assume that another unit is transmitting and will refrain from trying to transmit in order to prevent collisions. The default value is -85 dBm!Maximum Multicast Rate (AU only)– Determines the maximum rate of multicast and broadcast transmissions. Multicast and broadcast transmissions are not acknowledged; therefore there is a chance that such transmissions will not be properly received without the possibility of using the acknowledgement mechanism for retransmission. Therefore, it is recommended to use a lower rate for transmission of broadcast, multicast and control frames, to increase the probability that they will be received without errors. The available selections are 1, 2, and 3 Mbps. NOTE:The Number of Dwells to Retransmit is not applicable to ACSE voice frames since voice is sensitive to delay. All ACSE voice frames will be retransmitted within the same dwell, up to the maximum number of retransmissions allowed as defined by the ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice parameter.
Menus and Parameters 2-57BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe default is the minimum possible rate, 1Mbps.!Multi-Rate – Link quality dynamically changes, due to various environmental conditions. Dynamically switching between the possible transmission rates increases the probability of using the maximum rate for the current radio link quality at any given moment. Decreasing the rate one step improves the receiver sensitivity by 6-8dB. When enabled, the transmission rate decisions are made separately for each unit. This algorithm is completely separated from the retransmission mechanism defined by Number of Retransmission and Number of Dwells to Retransmit parameters. The algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous, adaptive support for multiple Subscriber Units at different rates. The decision on the rate of each transmission (first attempt) is based on counting transmissions, retransmissions and successful windows. A window is defined as N consecutive transmission or retransmission attempts, defined by the Multi-Rate Decision Window Size parameter. A successful window is a window in which the number of failed transmissions is not higher than a defined threshold. A transmission is defined as failed if an ACK was not received after the first transmission of a frame. If the current rate is lower than the maximum available rate, the transmission rate will be increased to the next available rate following a successful window. If the current rate is higher than the minimum available rate (1 Mbps), the transmission rate will be decreased to the next available rate following a failed window. The Multi-Rate menu includes the following parameters:"Multi-Rate Support – Enables or disables the Multi-Rate decision algorithm. When enabled, the algorithm supports increase/decrease of transmission rates in the range from 1 Mbps to the current value of the Maximum Data Rate parameter. (Enabling the algorithm has no effect if the Maximum Data Rate is 1 Mbps). The default selection is Enable."Multi-Rate Decision Window Size – Sets the size of the decision window. The size of a window is measured as the number of consecutive transmission or retransmission attempts. Increasing the size of the window will increase the probability that it will be a successful window, thus slowing down the decision to degrade to a lower rate and accelerating the decision to upgrade to a higher rate. Valid values are from 1 to 50. The default value is 12."Number of Failures in Multi-Rate Decision Window – Sets the maximum number of failures allowed in a decision window. A window is defined as successful only if the number of failures is not higher than this number. A transmission attempt is defined as a failure if an ACK was not received upon the first transmission attempt. Increasing
2-58 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01the value of this parameter will increase the probability that it will be a successful window, thus slowing down the decision to degrade to a lower rate and accelerating the decision to upgrade to a higher rate.Valid value: 1 to Multi-Rate Decision Window Size.Default value: 8. !Dwell Time (AU only) – The time spent on a radio channel before hopping to the next channel according to the operational hopping sequence. The allowed selections are 32, 64 and 128 Kilo-microseconds. The default value is 128 Kilo-microseconds. When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable and the dwell time is the ACSE Dwell Time, set to a fixed value of 60 milliseconds.Service Parameters (AU and SU)The Service Parameters menu includes the following parameters:!User Filtering Parameters – Only available in SUs. Defines IP addresses of user’s devices that are authorized to access the wireless media, serving for security and/or control purposes. It can also be used to enable transmission/reception of specific protocol frames only. These filtering functions do not affect management frames that are sent to or generated by the unit or.Choose this option to define the following parameters:"User Filtering Option – Disables or enables the User Filtering feature. The available options are:#Disable (No filtering).#IP Only (only IP Protocol packets pass).#User Defined Addresses Only (only messages from IP addresses included in the User Filter Addresses list pass).#PPPoE Protocol Only (only PPPoE frames pass - Ethernet type 0x8863 and 0x8864). The default selection is Disable."Set User Filter Address – Displays the current User Filter IP addresses. Allows you to enter up to 8 IP addresses to be used if the User Defined Addresses Only option was selected in the User Filtering Option above. The default for all addresses is 000.000.000.000."Set User Filter Mask – Displays the current masks. Allows you to enter subnet masks for each of the User Filter IP Address entries.
Menus and Parameters 2-59BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe default for all subnet masks is 255.255.255.255."Set User Filter Range – Defines a range of addresses for each of the User Filter IP Address entries (the range includes the base address).Valid values: 0 – 255. The default value is 0 (not used)."Delete a User Filtering Entry – Displays the current list of IP addresses, subnet masks and ranges. Enter the list number (from 0 to 7) to delete the entry from the list (the list number will be replaced by the default values)."Delete All User Filtering Entries – Deletes all User Filtering entries (and replaces them with the default values)."Show All User Filtering Parameters – Displays the current User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses, subnet masks and ranges.!MIR and CIR Parameters – The CIR (Committed Information Rate) value specifies the minimum data rate guaranteed to the applicable subscriber. The MIR (Maximum Information Rate) value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions, provided such bandwidth is available. Under normal conditions, the actual Information Rate (IR) will be between the applicable CIR and MIR values: IR=CIR+K(MIR-CIR), where K is between 0 to 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that may influence the performance of the wireless link. In some situations the minimum rate (CIR) cannot be provided. This may occur as a result of high demand and poor wireless link conditions and/or high demand in cells with over subscription (total CIR higher than 1600Kbps). When this happens, actual information rate will be lower than CIR. The simple solution for managing information rate in such cases results in an unfair allocation of resources, as subscribers with higher CIR can actually get an IR lower than that given to subscribers with lower CIR. A special algorithm for graceful degradation has been incorporated into the AU, ensuring that the degradation of performance for each individual subscriber will be proportional to its CIR. The MIR/CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data. To average the performance over time, a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable higher transmission rates after a NOTES:You may use either Mask or Range (but not both) to define a group of user filter addresses.If IP broadcast packets should reach the devices connected behind the SU unit, the Broadcast IP address should be included in the configured User Filter Address entries.
2-60 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01period of inactivity. If no data was received from the Ethernet port during the last N seconds, the unit is allowed to transmit N times its CIR value without any delay. For example, after an inactivity time of 0.5 second, a unit with CIR = 64 Kbps can transmit up to 64 Kbits x 0.5 = 32 Kbits without any delay. "MIR/CIR Option – Enables or disables the CIR/MIR support feature. In cells where the AU and all SUs use SW version 4.0 and higher, the MIR/CIR Option in the AU controls the operation of the whole cell. The MIR/CIR Option in the SU is thus meaningless, as the setting of the option in the AU will override possible conflicting setting in any of the served SUs. The option is available in the SUs only for compatibility with previous versions to support operation in cells where the AU uses SW version 3.X and lower. Default selection is Disable."MIR: AU to SU (SU only) – Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the down-link from the AU to the SU. The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value. Valid values are from 32 to 2200 Kbps. The default value is 128 Kbps. "MIR: SU to AU (SU only) – Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value. Valid values are from 32 to 2200Kbps. The default value is 128Kbps."CIR: AU to SU (SU only) – Sets the Committed Information Rate of the down-link from the AU to the SU. The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value. Valid values are from 0 to 2200Kbps.The default value is 64Kbps."CIR: SU to AU (SU only) – Sets the Committed Information Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value. Valid values are from 0 to 2200Kbps.The default value is 64Kbps."Maximum Burst Duration (SU and AU) – Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to the Burst Duration algorithm. NOTE:The value of the MIR/CIR option parameter must be the same for all Subscriber Units served by the same AU (i.e. Enable for all SUs or Disable for al SUs). Otherwise, throughput to/from all SUs in the cell may be reduced significantly
Menus and Parameters 2-61BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualValid values: 0 – 2000 (milliseconds).Default value: 5 (milliseconds), allowing a maximum burst of (0.005 X CIR) Kbps, after an inactivity period of 5 milliseconds or more. "Maximum Delay (SU only) – Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system. Some applications are very sensitive to delay. If relatively high delays are permitted, such applications may suffer from poor performance due to accumulation in the buffers of data from other applications (e.g. FTP). The Maximum Delay parameter limits the number of available buffers. Data that is delayed more than the permitted maximum delay will be discarded. If the SU should support applications that are very sensitive to delay, the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased.Valid values: 300 – 10000 (milliseconds).Default value: 5000 (milliseconds)."Graceful Degradation Limit (AU only) – Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm. In cases of over demand, the performance of all SUs will be degraded proportionally to their CIR (IR=(100%-k%) x CIR). The graceful degradation algorithm will be used as long as k ≤ K, where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit. Beyond this point the simple “brute force” algorithm will be used. The higher is the expected over demand in a cell, the higher should be the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit. Higher demand can be expected in cases of significant over subscription and/or in deployments where a high number of subscribers are in locations that do not enable proper communication with the AU at the highest data rate. Valid values: 0 – 70 (%).Default value: 70 (%). (Do not use the graceful degradation algorithm)"Mir Only option (AU only) – Enables or disables the option of forcing the MIR/CIR algorithm to use MIR values only. The MIR/CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate for each of the supported SUs under changing demand conditions, based on the configured CIR and MIR values. When the Mir Only Option is enabled, the MIR/CIR algorithm is overridden and is forced to operate with MIR values only (e.g. the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit/receive information at the specified MIR value. When enabled, the graceful degradation algorithm, which is a part of the CIR/MIR algorithm, is also disabled. The default is Disable."Show MIR/CIR Parameters – Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters. In SUs, the display includes
2-62 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01the Run-Time MIR/CIR Option, which is the actual status of the option (may be different from the MIR/CIR Option selected in the SU because it is controlled by the AU).!Show Service Parameters – Displays the current values of the Service Parameters.Security Parameters (AU and SU)Unauthorized wireless connection is prevented by using the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN standard. The WEP is based on RSA’s RC4 encryption algorithm. The following parameters are available in the Security Parameters menu: !Authentication Algorithm – Determines the operation mode of the unit. The available options are:"Open System: An SU configured to Open System can be authenticated only by an AU that is also configured to Open System. The WEP algorithm is not used."Shared Key: Authentication enabled. The authentication messages are encrypted. An SU configured to use Shared Key can be authenticated only by an AU configured to use Shared Key, provided they both use the same WEP Key. If the required algorithem is Shared Key, do the following:• Define at least one of the four WEP Keys by selecting one of them from the Security Parameters menu and entering the required key.• Select Default Key ID from the Security Parameters menu and enter the number of a defined WEP key.• Select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu.The Authentication Algorithm menu opens. • Select Shared Key.The default is Open System.!Default Key ID – Defines the ID of the key to be used for encryption of transmitted authentication messages and decryption of received authentication messages. Valid values are from 1 to 4.The default is WEP KEY # 1.!WEP KEY # 1 through WEP KEY # 4 – Enters the encryption key to be used for initialization of the pseudo-random number generator used in the RC4 encryption process. At least one WEP Key must be NOTE:The Shared Key option cannot be selected until at least one WEP Key and the appropriate Default Key ID are configured.
Menus and Parameters 2-63BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manualconfigured before the Shared Key authentication mode can be used. The Subscriber Unit must use the same WEP Key that is used by the Access Unit. The WEP Key is a string of 10 hexadecimal numbers. The default for all 4 keys is a string of 10 zeros (no key).Voice Parameters (Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) The parameters in the Voice Parameters menu include the following options:!Volume – Sets the gain of the voice signal to the earphone. Available range is 0 dB to -20 dB in 1 dB steps. The default value is -3 dB.!Echo Cancellation – Enables or disables the built-in echo cancellation feature. The default value is Enable.!Voice Codec – Specifys the relative priority of the codecs. The units support the following codecs: "G723.1 (6.4 Kbps rate, 1:10 compression ratio)"G729 (8 Kbps rate, 1:8 compression ratio)"G711 Ulaw (64 Kbps, no compression, US standard)"G711 Alaw (64 Kbps, no compression, European Standard)"G729AnnexA (G729 with reduced complexity)"G729wAnnexB (G729 with silence compression)"G729Annex AwAnnexB (G729 with reduced complexity and silence compression)You can enter a list of one to seven codecs, specifying the relative priorities to be offered during capabilities’ exchange according to the H.323 standard. For example, enter 1 to always use the G.723.1 codec. Enter 2, 1, 3, 4 to set the priorities according to the following order: G729, G723.1, G711µlaw, G711 Alaw. The range is 1 to 7654321. The default is 2134.!Compression Efficiency – Specifys the number of voice frames to be packed into one RTP (Real Time Protocol) frame. The higher the NOTE:It is recommended to change the WEP Keys periodically, to enhance system security.
2-64 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01value of the Frames per Packet parameter, the higher are the delay introduced (reduced quality) and the higher is the number of simultaneous voice sessions that can be supported by the AU. There is a separate setting for each of the voice codecs that are supported by the unit.The allowed range differs among codecs, in accordance with the different packet sizes (30 ms for G723.1, 10 ms for G729 and 5 ms for G711).The valid values and default values are:"G723 Frames Per Packet – Valid range 1-8, Default value is 2"G729 Frames Per Packet – Valid range is 1-12, Default value is 6. If upgrading from a previous version, this value must be set to 6 if ACSE Option is enabled. (covers all G729 codecs, including G729Annex A, G729wAnnexB and G729AnnexAwAnnexB)"G711u-law Frames Per Packet – Valid range is 1-16, Default value is 12"G711A-law Frames Per Packet – Valid range is 1-16, Default value is 12!Voice Activity Detection – Enables or disables the use of Voice Activity Detection (VAD). When the VAD algorithm is enabled, silence intervals are identified. Therefore, only relevant information is transmitted, using less bandwidth than during voice activity intervals. This allows for a better overall utilization of the available bandwidth. Voice Activity Detection is not applicable when using the G711 codec. Voice Activity Detection is implemented automatically in G729wAnnexB and G729 Annex A w Annex B (Annex B activates the silence compression).Available options are:"Voice Activity Detection OFF."Voice Activity Detection G7231 (enable when using G723.1 compression).The default selection is Voice Activity Detection OFF.Dialing Parameters (Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) The parameters in the Dialing Parameters menu include the following options:NOTE:When the ACSE Option is enabled, this parameter is not applicable and the default value is always used.
Menus and Parameters 2-65BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual!Pulse Dialing – Enables or disables the automatic pulse dialing detection feature to support telephones with pulse dialing. The default selection is Enable.!Gatekeeper Option – If set to Enable, the unit will communicate with the Gatekeeper to resolve the destination telephone number into the IP address and to register its own phone number and IP address with the Gatekeeper. The default selection is Disable.!GateKeeper/GateWay IP Address – Specifys the IP address of the Gateway/Gatekeeper. If the Gatekeeper Option parameter (see above) is set to Enable, an IP address must be specified. The default value is 000.000.000.000.!Alternate Gatekeeper Option - Enables or disables the Alternate Gatekeeper feature. For the purposes of ensuring system availability, redundancy, and scalability, the Gatekeeper may provide the RAS signaling function by utilizing multiple physical or logical devices, referred to as Alternate Gatekeepers. If the Alternate Gatekeeper Option set to Automatic Discover, the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is received from the Primary GK. Otherwise, in Manual Discovery mode the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is specified by the Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address parameter (see below).Valid selections: Disable, Enable (Automatic Discovery), Enable (Manual Discovery).Default selection is Disable.!Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address – Sets the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address when Alternate Gatekeeper Option parameter (see above) is set to Manual.The default value is 000.000.000.000.!Telephone Number – The telephone number as specified in the Gateway (if it is required by the specific type of Gateway used). Valid values: up to 10 digits (0-9). The default number is 0000....0 (10 zeros).!H323 Terminal ID – The H323 Terminal ID (Name) to be used for calling the terminal when the caller uses this feature (e.g. NetMeeting). Valid values: up to 24 characters. The default selection is X (No H323 Terminal ID).NOTE:When using a Gateway without a Gatekeeper, this number must be predefined in the Gateway
2-66 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!IP Dialing Option – Enables or disables dialing using IP addresses. The default selection is Enable.!IP Dialing Indicator – Specifys the prefix used to identify an IP Dialing string. Applicable only if the IP Dialing Option parameter (see above) is set to Enable. Digits dialed after IP Dialing Prefix are assumed to be the destination IP address. 12- and 3-digit numbers are allowed. 3- digit numbers are used to dial to stations in the same subnet, and 12- digit number are used to dial to any IP address. If a 3-digit number is dialed the Setup message is sent to the corresponding IP address in the local subnet. When dialing a 12-digit number (e.g. abcdefghijkl), the Setup message is sent directly to the IP address abc.def.ghi.jkl.Valid values: up to 3 phone key-pad digits (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) The default value is *.!Automatic Prefix – Specifys a default prefix (number of the Gateway trunk port) to be automatically inserted and transmitted to the gateway before the dialed number. The Automatic Prefix will be inserted only if the Dialing Option parameter (see below) is disabled, or if it is enabled and the first dialed digit is different from the defined Inter-Regional Prefix. Valid values: up to 8 phone key-pad digits (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)The default is X (no Gateway Prefix).!Fast Start – Enables or disables the fast connect protocol, which is a H.323 Version II feature that allows decreasing the connection set-up time (if supported by the Gateway). The original procedure prior to H.323 Version II required four round trips of messages between endpoints before the first media stream is exchanged between peers. Fast Connect, or Fast Start, is a new procedure added to H.323 version II. It reduces the number of round trips to one by combining the call connect procedures into a single H.225 transaction. The default selection is Enable.!Information Transfer Capability – To define the value of the information transfer capability element in the Q.931 SETUP message.Available selections: "Speech (used by H.323 speech terminals)"Unrestricted (used by H.323 AudioVisual terminals for unrestricted digital information)"Restricted (used H.323 AudioVisual terminals for restricted digital information) "3.1 kHz audio (used by H.323 speech terminals)
Menus and Parameters 2-67BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual"Unrestricted with tones (used by H.323 AudioVisual terminals for transmission of unrestricted digital information with tones/announcement)"Video (not used by H.323 terminals)The default is Speech.!Dialing Prefix Parameters – Supports definition of prefix strings indicating an inter-regional or international call. The algorithm supports dialing plans where one specific digit is used as the prefix for inter-regional calls, and two specific digits are used as the prefix for international calls, where the first one is the same as the inter-regional call prefix. It can also support dialing plans in which the inter-regional prefix should be removed at the CPE before the dialed number is transferred to the system. The dialing plan support algorithm incorporated into the units operates as follows:• If the Dialing Prefix Option is disabled the unit will insert the Automatic Prefix (if defined) before the dialed number. Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed.• If the Dialing Prefix Option is set to Enabled and the first dialed digit differs from the Inter-Regional Prefix the unit will insert the Automatic Prefix (if defined) before the dialed number. Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed.• If the Dialing Prefix Option is set to Enable & Block Inter-Regional Prefix and the first dialed digit differs from the Inter-Regional Prefix, the unit will insert the Automatic Prefix (if defined) before the dialed number. If the first dialed digit is the Inter-Regional Prefix and the second one differs from the International Prefix (indicating an inter-regional call), the first digit (the Inter-Regional Prefix) will be removed before forwarding the dialed number, thus blocking inter-regional calls at the unit. Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed."Dialing Prefix Option – Enables or disables the dialing prefix support capability. Valid options are: Disable, Enable, Enable & Block Inter-Regional Prefix.Default selection is Disable."Inter-Regional Prefix – Defines the prefix indicating an inter-regional call. This is also the first digit in the two digits string indicating an international call.Valid values: One phone key-pad digit (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) and X (no prefix). NOTE:This information element is encoded according to Figure 4-11/Q.931 and Table 4-6/Q.931. The SU support only H323 Speech traffic and a change of the default value is not recommended. A change will be needed only as result of special PSTN switch requirements.
2-68 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Default value: 0. "International Prefix – Defines the second digit in the two digits string indicating an international call.Valid values: One phone key-pad digit (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) and X (no prefix).Default value: 0.!Registration TTL – Defines the registration Time To Live. Registration is the process by which an endpoint informs the Gatekeeper of its Transport Addresses and alias addresses. Registration must occur before any calls are attempted and may occur periodically as necessary (for example, at endpoint power-up).After Registration process has finished an endpoint will no longer send Registration Request (RRQ) messages. So, GK may become unavailable for the endpoint after its reset. To exclude this possibility a keep-alive mechanism should be applied.An endpoint's registration with a Gatekeeper may have a finite lifetime. An endpoint may request a timeToLive in the RRQ message to the Gatekeeper. The Gatekeeper may respond with an RCF containing the same timeToLive or a shorter timeToLive. After this time, the registration shall be expired. The timeToLive is expressed in seconds. Prior to the expiration time, the endpoint may send an RRQ message having the keepAlive bit set. The keep-alive RRQ resets the time to live timer in the Gatekeeper, allowing the registration to be extended. After the expiration time, the endpoint must re-register with a Gatekeeper using a full RRQ message.Valid values: 0 (the keep-alive mechanism is not activated), 1-65535 (seconds)Default value: 0 !DTMF Relay – Selects the method of handling DTMF signals. DTMF input may be transferred through a network in-band by RTP payloads, or using DTMF relay. The use of DTMF relay is preferred as it overcomes the problems of RTP packet loss and jitter. When DTMF relay is used, DTMF digits are transferred using H.245 protocol messages (standard), or Q.931 protocol message (proprietary). The DTMF relay can handle all phone-pad digits (0-9, A-D, *, #) and Hook-Flash (!). The following options are available:"Disable – DTMF tones are transferred in band (through the voice codec using the RTP protocol)"Enable – DTMF signals are relayed via H.245 sessions. If Fast Start is enabled, a H.245 session will be forced upon detecting DTMF signals."Enable Proprietary – If Fast Start is enabled, DTMF signal will be relayed via Q.931 sessions. If Fast Start is disabled, DTMF signal will be relayed via H.245 sessions.
Menus and Parameters 2-69BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualThe default selection is Enable.!Endpoint Type – Defines the EndpointType components in H.323 messages for interoperability with other equipment using H.323.Available options are Terminal, Gateway.The default is Terminal!Fax Relay – Defines the use of T.38 protocol for relaying fax messages. T.38 is a protocol dedicated to fax. In the T.38 architecture, fax signals are demodulated at the voice/fax gateway and sent over the IP network as IP fax packets using either TCP or UDP, depending on the service environment. TCP provides 100% error-free transmission, but the downside is reduced real-time performance. When congestion occurs, routers discard TCP packets first. UDP has good real-time performance, since routers do not discard datagrams as readily as TCP packets. However, the downside of UDP is a reduced quality of service. It is possible for datagrams to get lost, arrive out of order, or to be duplicated. A redundancy mechanism can be employed to restore IFP fax data packets. At the other end of the IP network, the remote gateway decodes IP fax packets and regenerates fax signals. Modulation methods that can be used with the T.38 format are V.21 Channel 2, V.27ter 2400, V.27ter 4800, V.29 7200, V.29 9600, V.17 7200, V.17 9600, V.17 12000, and V.17 14400.The Fax Relay menu includes the following parameters:"Fax Relay Option – Enables or disables the use of the T.38 protocol for relaying fax messages.The default selection is Disable."Fax Relay Redundancy – Defines the redundancy (number of additional times each fax frame is transmitted) to be used when transmitting T.38 fax messages.Valid values: 0 –5.Default value: 3.!Battery Polarity – Defines the battery polarity for supporting an external device, e.g. for coins or tokens charging purpose. This feature is fully supported by units with voice card from revision D and up. The available options are:"Forward Battery – Regular polarity"Reverse Battery – Reverse polarityNOTE:To enable the Fax Relay Option, the Fast Start parameter must also be enabled.
2-70 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01"Forward -> Reverse Battery – Change the polarity from forward to reverse"Reverse -> Forward Battery – Change the polarity from reverse to forwardThe default is Forward Battery.!Caller ID: Defines whether the unit will support generation of Caller ID (CID) signaling and if CID generation is supported, which standard will be used. The unit supports two CID signaling standards:"Voice band Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 – 1"1200-baud tone modulation in accordance with Bellcore 202 standard.The Caller ID parameter is supported only by units using a Voice card HW revision D and higher.The following options are available:"Disable"ETSI DT-AS: CID signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 -1, using Dual Tone Alerting Signal to indicated to the called terminal that CID data transmission is to be expected."ETSI RP-AS: CID signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 -1, using Ringing Pulse Alerting Signal to indicate to the called terminal that CID data transmission is to be expected."ETSI – During Ringing: CID signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 -1, transmitting CID data during the first long silence between two ring patterns."Bellcore MDMF: CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202, using Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF), which includes a name field in addition to the date, time and number."Bellcore SDMF: CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202, using Single Data Message Format (SDMF), which includes the date, time and number.!Stop Dialing Timeout: The inactivity time following the last dialed digit that will be identified by the unit as an indication to end of dialing.Valid range: 3 to 60 secondsDefault value: 5 seconds!Stop Dialing Indicator: Uses the # sign to indicate end of dialing, thus to speed the dialing process. The options are:
Menus and Parameters 2-71BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual"Disable: The # sign is interpreted as a part of the dialed sequence. End of dialing is determined by the Stop Dialing Timeout parameter. "Enable: The # sign is interpreted as indicating end of dialing sequence.Telephony Signals (Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only)The Telephony Signals menu defines the various call progress tones that indicate the status of a telephone call, the ringer parameters and some timeouts. The call progress tones are generated by the Subscriber Unit in accordance with call progress information as received from the AU or the telephony network. The parameters in the Telephony Signals menu include the following options:!Telephony Country Standard – Selects the call progress tones standard. The following options are available: "Proprietary – Allows definition of specific tones as described below."Germany"Sweden"France"United Kingdom"Belgium"USA"ChileThe default selection is USA.!Dial Tone –Defines the dial tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the call can be supported by the system and that the caller may start dialing. !Ring-Back Tone – Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the telephone of the called party is ringing.!Busy Tone – Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the telephone of the called party is busy.!Congestion Tone - Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the system cannot currently support the call (e.g. if a line is not available since the AU currently supports the maximum allowed number of voice sessions).!Error Tone – Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the system cannot currently support the call (e.g. if for
2-72 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01any reason the call was disconnected because of a problem in the wireless link or incompatible capabilities) or if the user did not hang up after exceeding the specified duration of the Dial, Ring Back, Busy or Congestion Tones.!High Level Error Tone – Defines the high level tone transmitted to the earphone to better attract the attention of the user if he did not hang up after exceeding the specified duration of the Error Tone.The various tones are defined by specifying the following parameters:"Frequency 1 – One of two frequencies that can be used for generating the applicable tone. Valid values are 0-3000 (in Hz). "Frequency 2 – The second of the two frequencies to be used for generating the applicable tone. Valid values are 0-3000 (in Hz). "Level 1 – The level (in dBm) of Frequency 1.Valid values are –32 to +3."Level 2 – The level (in dBm) of Frequency 2.Valid values are –32 to +3."Cadence On – The ringing time (on) in the tones-silence sequence of the tone. Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds, 0 (0 means that the tone is not used). "Cadence Off – The silence time (off) in the tones-silence sequence of the tone. Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds, 0 (0 means no silence – a continuous tone)."Duration – The maximum duration of transmitting the tone to the earphone. Tone generation will cease upon hang-up.Valid values are 0 – 10,000 seconds.!Ring Frequency - Defines the ring frequency parameters (that define the ringing of the telephone set), if the selected Telephony Country parameter is Proprietary. The following parameters can be defined:"Ringer Frequency – the frequency of activating the Ringer.Valid values are: 17Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, 50Hz."Cadence On – The ringing time (on) in the ringing-silence sequence of the Ringer.Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds.
Menus and Parameters 2-73BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual"Cadence Off – The silence time (on) in the ringing-silence sequence of the Ringer. Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds. "Duration - The maximum duration of activating the ringer. Ringing will cease upon detecting off-hook condition.Valid values are 0 – 10,000 seconds.!Timeouts – Defines the following timeouts:"Min. Flash Detect Timeout and Max. Flash Detect Timeout – A short on-hook time that is between the values of these two parameters will be considered as Hook Flash.Valid values: 0 – 2,000 milliseconds"Disconnect Timeout – The minimum time for decision on an on-hook condition.Valid values: 0 – 2,000 milliseconds"Inter-Digit Timeout – Applicable only for pulse dialing. The minimum time between two consecutive pulses to be considered as separating between two digits.Valid values: 0 – 2,000 milliseconds"Called Party Release Timeout – The minimum time for an on-hook signal on the called party side to be considered as call disconnect. Valid values: 0 – 10,000 secondsThe following tables provide details concerning the values of the parameters of the various call progress tones and the ringer as well as the Timeouts for the available country standards.
2-74 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Table 2-14: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - GermanyTable 2-15: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - USAFrequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 450 -18 0 0 15Ring Back 450 -18 0 0 1000 4000 60Busy 450 -18 0 0 500 500 15 Congestion 450 -18 0 0 250 250 0Error 450 -18 0 0 200 200 0High Level Error 0000000Ring Frequency 25 1000 5000 60Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 350 -13 440 -13 15Ring Back 440 -19 480 -19 1000 3000 60Busy 480 -24 620 -24 500 500 15 Congestion 480 -24 620 -24 1000 1000 0Error 480 -24 620 -24 200 200 0High Level Error 0000000RingFrequency 20 1000 3000 60
Menus and Parameters 2-75BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 2-16: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - SwedenTable 2-17: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - FranceFrequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 425 -18 0 0 15Ring Back 425 -18 0 0 1000 5000 60Busy 425 -18 0 0 250 250 15 Congestion 425 -18 0 0 250 750 0Error 425 -18 0 0 200 200 0High Level Error 0000000RingFrequency 25 1000 5000 60Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 425 -18 0 0 15Ring Back 425 -18 0 0 1500 3500 60Busy 425 -18 0 0 500 500 15 Congestion 425 -18 0 0 500 500 0Error 425 -18 0 0 200 200 0High Level Error 0000000RingFrequency 25 1500 3500 60
2-76 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01Table 2-18: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer – United KingdomTable 2-19: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - BelgiumFrequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 350 -18 440 -18 15Ring Back 400 -18 450 -18 400 200 60Busy 400 -18 0 0 375 375 15 Congestion 400 -18 0 0 400 350 0Error 400 -18 0 0 200 200 0High Level Error 0000000RingFrequency 25 400 200 60Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 425 -12 0 0 15Ring Back 425 -18 0 0 1000 3000 60Busy 425 -18 0 0 500 500 15 Congestion 425 -18 0 0 167 167 0Error 425 -18 0 0 200 200 0High Level Error 0000000RingFrequency 25 1000 3000 60
Menus and Parameters 2-77BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTable 2-20: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer – ChileTable 2-21: TimeoutsHopping Parameters (GU)The Hopping Parameters Menu allows configuration of the hopping mechanism. The GPS modules deliver signals to the Access Units that insure that their hopping patterns are fully synchronized. This includes synchronizing the time each unit starts a new hop and ensuring that units start the hopping sequence simultaneously.!Number of Hopping Frequencies – Configures the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter to guarantee that all the Access Units managed by the GPS module will start their hopping sequence simultaneously. To determine the correct number of hopping frequencies, access the monitor program in one of the AU units, select Show Basic Configuration in the Info Screens menu and view the Number of Hopping Frequencies value displayed.Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)Tone Freq (Hz) Level (dB) Freq (Hz) Level (dB) On (ms) Off (ms)Dial Tone 400 -6 0 0 20Ring Back 400 -6 0 0 1000 3000 120Busy 400 -6 0 0 500 500 20 Congestion 400 -6 0 0 200 200 20Error 400 -6 0 0 500 500 20High Level Error 400 3 0 0 500 500 20Ringer 20 1000 3000 120Country Min. Flash Detect (ms) Max Flash Detect (ms) Disconnect (ms) Inter-digit (ms) Called Party Release (s)Germany 120 1000 1000 100 0USA 120 1000 1000 100 0Sweden 120 1000 1000 100 0France 120 1000 1000 100 0United Kingdom 120 1000 1000 100 0Belgium 120 1000 1000 100 0Chile 220 320 320 500 60
2-78 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01If the ISM hopping sequence is used (ISM US FCC or ISM International), the number of hopping frequencies is 79.!Dwell Time – Applicable only when the ACSE Option is disabled. When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable and the dwell time is the ACSE Dwell Time, set to a fixed value of 60 milliseconds (see page 2-58).!ACSE Option – see page 2-40!Synchronization Signal Source – Defines the source of the synchronization signals. The possible selections are:"GPS Antenna or Internal"Local (from other GU) When using a single GU, it should always be configured to GPS Antenna or Internal. When using several daisy-chained units and a GPS antenna is connected to the first (“Master”) unit, than ALL units should also be configured to GPS Antenna or Internal.When using several daisy-chained units without a GPS antenna, than the first (”Master”) unit that generates the self-synchronization signals for all units unit should be configured to GPS Antenna or Internal. All other units (“Slave units”) that get the synchronization signals from the “Master” unit should be configured to Local (from other GU).The default is GPS Antenna or Internal.Alarm Parameters (GU)The GU module serves also as the alarms control unit for the BreezeACCESS system and auxiliary equipment. It has dry contact connections to 4 external alarm inputs (Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4), that turn on upon contact closure. It also receives alarm indications from BreezeACCESS power supply module (Alarm In 7 through Alarm In 10), that turn on to indicate a power failure or over temperature problem in any of the two optional power supplies. PS1 alarms refer to a power supply module inserted in the left-most slot of the chassis. PS2 alarms refer to a power supply module inserted in the right-most slot of NOTE:The values of the ACSE Option and Dwell Time (if the ACSE Option is disabled) parameters must be the same for all GPS modules and Access Units in the system to enable synchronized hopping.WARNING:Do not connect a GPS antenna to the BS-GU module when the selected Synchronization Signal Source is Local. This will cause collisions of signals and may damage the equipment.
Menus and Parameters 2-79BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manualthe chassis. Alarm In 5 (GPS Antenna Status) is generated internally in the GU module, and it is turned on to indicate that proper PPS (pulse per second) timing signals are received from the GPS antenna.The GU module can also control 3 Alarm Out relay, where each relay has a common contact, a normally open (NO) contact and a normally closed (NC) contact.The Alarm Parameters menu allows access to the following sub-menus:!Alarms In Names.!Alarms Out Names.!Automatic Alarms Out Definition.!Alarms Out Control.!Show Alarm Parameters.Alarms In NamesThe Alarms In Names menu allows names for each of the four external alarm indications that can be connected to the AL IN connector to be defined. These names can reflect the specific environment in which the module is being used (e.g. “Smoke Detector 1” or “Main Door”). Each Alarms In Name can contain up to 31 printable ASCII characters (case sensitive). The default names are Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4.Alarms Out NamesThe Alarms Out Names menu allows names for each of the three external devices that can be connected to the AL OUT connector to be defined. These names can reflect the specific environment in which the module is being used (e.g. “Alarm Light 1”). Each Alarms Out Name can contain up to 31 printable ASCII characters (case sensitive). The default names are Alarm Out 1 through Alarm Out 3.Automatic Alarms Out DefinitionThe Automatic Alarms Out Definition menu allows you to define the conditions under which each of the 3 Alarms Out are to be activated (when operating in Automatic mode). The available options for each of the three Alarms Out are:!1 – Activate if Alarm In 1 turns ON.NOTES:Over Temperature alarm indication is only supported by the AC power supply module. In installations with a single power supply module, the GU module doesn’t function (and therefore will not provide an alarm indication) upon total failure of the power supply or upon failure of the 5 V module.
2-80 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01!2 – Activate if Alarm In 2 turns ON.!3 – Activate if Alarm In 3 turns ON.!4 – Activate if Alarm In 4 turns ON.!5 - Activate if Alarm In 5 (GPS Antenna Status) turns ON!6 - Not Applicable (Alarm In 6 is not defined)!7 - Activate if Alarm In 7 (PS1Over Temperature) turns ON!8 - Activate if Alarm In 8 (PS2 Over Temperature) turns ON!9 - Activate if Alarm In 9 (PS1 Power) turns ON!10 - Activate if Alarm In 10 (PS2 Power) turns ON!N – None (never activate this Alarm Out).!A - Activate if ANY of the Alarms In turns ON.The default for all three Alarms Out is 0 (None – never activate the alarm).Alarms Out ControlThe Alarms Out Control menu allows the functionality of the Alarms Out control mechanism to be defined. Its main purpose is to support “manual” activation/deactivation of each of the Alarms Out either locally or remotely using Telnet or SNMP. For each of the three Alarms Out, the following control options are available:!0 – Turn Alarm OFF (even if it should be ON according to the definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu).!1 – Turn Alarm ON (even if it should be OFF according to the definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu).!2 – Automatic (activate/deactivate according to the definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu).The default for all three Alarms Out is 2 (Automatic).Show Alarm Parameters Shows the current values of the Alarms In and Alarms Out parameters as well as their current status:!Alarms In Names And StatusDisplays the names and current status (ON or OFF) for all Alarm In indications, including “internal” alarms, as follows:"Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4: Name according to the name defined in the Alarms In Names Menu."Alarm In 5: GPS Antenna Status."Alarm In 6: NA (reserved for future use).
Menus and Parameters 2-81BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual"Alarm In 7: PS1 Over Temperature (over temperature indication for BS-PS Power Supply module 1, which is the module inserted in the left-most slot of the chassis)."Alarm In 8: PS2 Over Temperature (over temperature indication for BS-PS Power Supply module 2, which is the module inserted in the right-most slot of the chassis)."Alarm In 9: PS1 Power (power fail indication for BS-PS Power Supply module 1, which is the module inserted in the left-most slot of the chassis)."Alarm In 10: PS2 Power (power fail indication for BS-PS Power Supply module 2, which is the module inserted in the right-most slot of the chassis).!Alarms Out Names, Definitions, Control and StatusDisplays the following information for each of the three Alarms Out:"Name: Name according to the name defined in the Alarms In Names Menu."Definition: NONE, Alarm In # or ANY, according to the configuration in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu."Control: OFF, ON or AUTO, according to the configuration in the Alarms Out Control Menu."Status: ON or OFF.NOTE:In some installations only one Power Supply module (either PS1 or PS2) may be used.
2-82 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 3ConfigurationDownload/UploadThis chapter describes the method of configuring a large number of BreezeACCESS units at once.About This Chapter
3-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and AdministrationManual Revision: 1.01The Configuration Download/Upload feature in BreezeACCESS units simplifies the task of remotely configuring a large number of units using TFTP protocol.By downloading the configuration file to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured at the unit, as it is a plain text ASCII file.It is necessary to edit the file by a using simple editor and to remove certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to another unit.When multiple configuration is performed (uploading the file to several units) it is recommended that only the relevant parameters be included in the file .Each parameter is represented in the file by three fields:!A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the monitor program, followed by “=”.!The value of the parameters (using the same values that are used in the monitor program).!A comment (optional). If used, it should start with a “;” character.The unit will ignore an unknown parameter or a known parameter with an out of range value.Use the SNMP write community string (the default is “private”) to define both the uploaded file (put) and the downloaded file (get): SnmpWriteCommunity.cfgThe file should be transferred in ASCII mode.Example: To upload the configuration file using DOS based TFTP Client to an SU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65: tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cfgTo download the configuration file from the same unit: tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cfg Suconf
BreezeACCESS VSystem Manual:Appendices
Appendix A:Software VersionLoading ProcedureGeneralFirmware upgrades to the unit's FLASH memory are performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application. Before performing an upgrade procedure, be sure you have the correct files and latest instructions.Verify that you have IP connectivity to the unit to be loaded with a new version. Verify that the IP address of the PC from which you intend to perform the upgrade belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded (unless the unit is behind a router). If the unit is behind a router, verify that the unit is configured with the correct Default Gateway Address.To view the current IP parameters of the unit, use the monitor program by connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet and use the following procedure: 1. From the Main Menu select 1 – Info Screens. The Info Screens menu opens.2. From the Info Screen menu select 2 – Show Basic Configuration. A display of the current configuration of the basic parameters appears, including the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters. To configure any of the IP parameters, use the following procedure:1. From the Main Menu select 3 – Basic Configuration. The Basic Configuration menu opens.2. To configure the IP Address, select: 1 – IP Address. 3. To configure the Subnet Mask, select 2 – Subnet Mask. 4. To configure the Default Gateway Address select 3 – Default Gateway Address.5. Reset the unit in order for the new configuration to apply.NOTE:Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to be inoperable.
A-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.016. To verify the connection, ping the unit’s IP address. Verify that ping replies are being received.The procedure to be used depends on the unit’s FLASH memory type. Identify the FLASH memory type by using the monitor program, connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet.From the Main Menu, select 1 – Info Screens. From the Info Screen menu select 1 – Show Unit Status. The last line of the Unit Status display will indicate the FLASH type (type F or type S).Use the TFTP utility, with the following syntax, to perform the upgrade:tftp –i hostaddress put sourcefile [destinationfile]Where -i is for binary mode, hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded, put defines that the PC (client) will send a file to the hostaddress and destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded.
Appendix A A-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualLoading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type: FUse the following table to determine which source file name to use, according to the unit’s type.X, refers to the software version number, up to 5 decimal digits (e.g. for software release 4.0.40, X=4040).Use the SNMP write community <SnmpWriteCommunity>.dwn (the default write community is private) to define the destination filename.For example, to load the upgrade file A3011F.BS to an AU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65 use the following syntax: tftp –i 206.25.63.65 put A3011F.BS private.dwnWhen version loading is completed the following message is displayed:Loading operation has been completed successfullyThe FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is called Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new version is loaded into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory. To check that the new firmware was loaded properly, view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH using the following procedure:1. From the Main Menu, select 2 – Unit Control. The Unit Control menu opens.2. From the Unit Control menu, select 5 – Flash Memory Control. The Flash Memory Control menu opens.Unit Type Source File NameAU AXF.BSSU AXF.SUSU with Voice AXF.SUVGU AXF.GUNOTE:If you are upgrading a Subscriber Unit which is not associated with an AU, the unit will reset every five minutes (approximately) and the following message will be displayed:FTL: file src\wpscan.c line 262 Too large number of scanningattemptsThe unit will reset and it will take more than a minute before you can re-establish the connection to it. You should either have the SU associated with an AU before starting the loading process or complete the loading process before the unit resets. Otherwise you will have to try again until you complete the loading process.
A-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.013. From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S – Show Flash Versions. The display appears as follows:Flash Versions===========Current Version: 3.0.39Shadow Version: 4.0.40Version After Reset:3.0.39From the Flash Memory Control menu select the active software version, using the following procedures:To activate the backup (shadow) version: 1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 1 - Reset and Boot from Shadow Version. The Reset and Boot from Shadow Version menu opens.2. Select 1 – Reset Now and press ENTER. 3. The unit resets and the Shadow version is used as the newactive version. Note that after the next reset, the Current version will be activated again.If the active version is the Shadow version and you wish to continue using it after the next Reset, use the following procedure:1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 2 - Use Current Version After Reset. The Use Current Version After Reset menu opens.2. Select 1 – Set As Default Now and press ENTER. This will actually cause the names of the two versions to switch. The previous Shadow version will now be called Current and vise versa. The following message will be displayed: UP (DOWN) Image FLASH will be operational (UP or DOWN refers to the location in the flash memory).The loading procedure is protected. An attempt to load an invalid version (e.g. using <SnmpWriteCommunity>.fmr when trying to load a new version to units with a FLASH Type: F) will be rejected.
Appendix A A-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualLoading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type: SUse the following table to determine which source file name to use, according to the unit’s type.X refers to the software version number, up to 5 decimal digits (e.g. for software release 4.0.40, X=4040).Use the SNMP write community <SnmpWriteCommunity>.fmr (default write community is private) to define the destination filename. For example: to load the upgrade file A3011S.SU to an SU whose IP address is 206.25.63.55 use the following syntax:>tftp –i 206.25.63.55 put A3011S.SU private.fmr When loading is completed the following message is displayed: Loadingoperation has been completed successfully.The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is called Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new version is loaded into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory. To check that the new firmware was loaded properly, view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH using the following procedure:1. From the Main Menu, select 2 – Unit Control. The Unit Control menu opens.2. From the Unit Control menu, select 5 – Flash Memory Control. The Flash Memory Control menu opens.Unit Type File NameAU AXS.BSSU AXS.SUSU with Voice AXS.SUVGU AXS.GUNOTE:If you are upgrading a Subscriber Unit which is not associated with an AU, the unit will reset every five minute (approximately) and the following message will be displayed:FTL: file src\wpscan.c line 262 Too large number of scanningattemptsThe unit will reset and it will take more than a minute before you can re-establish the connection to it. You should either have the SU associated with an AU before starting the loading process or complete the loading process before the unit resets. Otherwise you will have to try again until you complete the loading process.
A-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.013. From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S – Show Flash Versions. The display appears as follows:Flash Versions===========Current Version: 3.0.39Shadow Version: 4.0.40Version After Reset:3.0.39From the Flash Memory Control menu select the active software version, using the following procedures:To activate the backup (shadow) version: 1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 1 - Reset and Boot from Shadow Version. The Reset and Boot from Shadow Version menu opens.2. Select 1 – Reset Now and press ENTER. 3. The unit resets and the Shadow version is used as the newactive version. Note that after the next reset, the Current version will be activated again.If the active version is the Shadow version and you wish to continue using it after the next Reset, use the following procedure:1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 2 - Use Current Version After Reset. The Use Current Version After Reset menu opens.2. Select 1 – Set As Default Now and press ENTER. This will actually cause the names of the two versions to switch. The previous Shadow version will now be called Current and vise versa. The following message will be displayed: UP (DOWN) Image FLASH will be operational (UP or DOWN refers to the location in the flash memory).The loading procedure is protected. An attempt to load an invalid version (e.g. using <SnmpWriteCommunity>.fmr when trying to load a new version to units with a FLASH Type: S) will be rejected.
Appendix B:Supported MIBsand TrapsBreezeACCESS agents support the following MIBs:!MIB-II (RFC1213)!BRIDGE-MIB (RFC1286)!BreezeCOM brzAccessMib !BreezeCOM brzPhoneMib!BreezeCOM brznetmib
B-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01BreezeACCESS System Object IdentifiersPath:breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER =1.3.6.1.4.1.710{(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) breezecom(710)} breezecomNewOID OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10{breezecom 10}breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10.2{breezecomNewOID 2}breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10.2.1{breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts 1}breezecomBreezeACCESS_General OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10.2.2{breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts 2}Object OID (Location in parenthesis) DescriptionbreezecomSU_AE_1D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 1(710.10.2.1.1) SU-A/E-1DbreezecomSU_AE_8D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 2(710.10.2.1.2) SU-A/E-8DbreezecomSU_AE_BD breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 3(710.10.2.1.3) SU-A/E-BDbreezecomSU_AE_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 4(710.10.2.1.4) SU-A/E-1D1VbreezecomSU_AE_8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 5(710.10.2.1.5) SU-A/E-8D1VbreezecomSU_AE_BD1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 6(710.10.2.1.6) SU-A/E-BD1VbreezecomSU_I_1D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 7(710.10.2.1.7) SU-I-1DbreezecomSU_I_8D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 8(710.10.2.1.8) SU-I-8DbreezecomSU_I_BD breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 9(710.10.2.1.9) SU-I-BDbreezecomSU_I_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 10(710.10.2.1.10) SU-I-1D1VbreezecomSU_I_8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 11(710.10.2.1.11) SU-I-8D1VbreezecomSU_I_BD1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 12(710.10.2.1.12) SU-I-BD1VbreezecomSU_R_1D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 13(710.10.2.1.13) SU-R-1DbreezecomSU_R_8D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 14(710.10.2.1.14) SU-R-8DbreezecomSU_R_BD breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 15(710.10.2.1.15) SU-R-BDbreezecomSU_R_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 16(710.10.2.1.16) SU-R-1D1VbreezecomSU_R_8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 17(710.10.2.1.17) SU-R-8D1V
Appendix B B-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualbreezecomSU_R_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 18(710.10.2.1.18) SU-R-BD1VbreezecomAU_NI breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 19(710.10.2.1.19) AU-NIbreezecomAU_BS breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 20(710.10.2.1.20) AU-BSbreezecomAU_I breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 21(710.10.2.1.21) AU-IbreezecomSU_BS breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 22(710.10.2.1.22) SU-BSbreezecomAU_BS_WA breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 23(710.10.2.1.23) AU-BS-WAbreezecomGU_BS breezecomBreezeACCESS_GENERAL 1(710.10.2.2.1) GU-BS
B-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01brzAccessMIBPath:breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER =1.3.6.1.4.1.710{(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) breezecom(710)} breezecomPrvRev OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3{breezecom 3}brzAccessMib OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3.3{breezecomPrvRev 3}Note: * is used instead of the brzacc prefixService ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*ServiceParameters710.3.3.1(brzAccessMib 1) MIR/CIR Parameters.*MirCirOption710.3.3.1.1 (*ServiceParameters 1)Applicable to SU and AU only. The setting in the AU enables/disables the MIR/CIR support feature for all SUs served by the AU, regardless of the setting in the SU.The option exists in the SU only for compatibility with AUs running SW versions 3.X and lower, in which case the MIR/CIR support feature is controlled at the SU. Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*MirAUtoSU 710.3.3.1.2 (*ServiceParameters 2)Applicable to SU only. Sets the Maximum Information Rate (MIR) from AU to SU. Integer 32–2200 (Kbps)Must be higher than *CirAUtoSU *MirSUtoAU710.3.3.1.3 (*ServiceParameters 3)Applicable to SU only. Sets the Maximum Information Rate (MIR) from SU to AU. Integer32–2200 (Kbps)Must be higher than *CirSUtoAU*CirAUtoSU 710.3.3.1.4 (*ServiceParameters 4)Applicable to SU only. Sets the Committed Information Rate (CIR) from AU to SU. Integer 0–2200 (Kbps)Must be lower than *MirAUtoSU*CirSUtoAU710.3.3.1.5 (*ServiceParameters 5)Applicable to SU only. Sets the Committed Information Rate (CIR) from SU to AU. Integer 0–2200 (Kbps)Must be lower than *MirSUtoAU*MaxDelay710.3.3.1.6 (*ServiceParameters 6)Applicable to SU only. Sets the maximal time packets may be delayed by the CIR\MIR mechanism. Above the configured maximal period the packets are discarded.Integer300 – 10,000 (milliseconds)*MaxBurstDuration710.3.3.1.7 (*ServiceParameters 7)Applicable to SU and AU. Sets the maximum time during which ìinactivity bonusî time can be accumulated for future burst transmissions.Integer 0 – 2000 (milliseconds) *GracefulDegradationLimit710.3.3.1.8 (*ServiceParameters 8)Applicable to AU only. Sets the maximum limit for activating the graceful degradation algorithm.Integer0 – 70 (%)*RunTimeMirCirOption710.3.3.1.9 (*ServiceParameters 9)Applicable to SU only. Indicates the actual status of the MIR/CIR option, which may be different from the setting of this parameter in the SU since it is controlled by the AU.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)
Appendix B B-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualUser Filtering Parameters*MirOnlyOption710.3.3.1.10 (*ServiceParameters 10)Applicable only to AU when CIR/MIR option is enabled. When enabled, the MIR/CIR algorithm fo determining the actual information rate is overridden and operates only with the configured MIR values. The graceful degradation algorithm is disabled.disable (0)enable (1)na (255)MIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*UserFilterParams710.3.3. 2(brzAccessMib 2)Applicable to SU only. User Filtering parameters.*UserFilterOption710.3.3.2.1 (*UserFilterParams 1)Applicable to SU only. Defines user-filtering options.disable: No filtering.iPOnly: Only IP protocol frames pass. userDefinedAddrOnly: Only frames from user defined IP addresses pass.pPPoE Only: Only PPPoE frames pass.Integerdisable (0)iPOnly (1)userDefinedAddrOnly(2)pPPoEOnly (3)na (255)*IpFilterTable710.3.3.2.2 (*UserFilterParams 2)Applicable to SU only. An IP Filter Table of up to 8 user defined addresses, or address groups, to be used if the selected User Filtering option is userDefinedAddrOnly. Not accessible.*IpFilterEntry710.3.3.2.2.1(*IpFilterTable 1)Applicable to SU only. An IP Filter Table entry. Not accessible.*IpID710.3.3.2.2.1.1 (*IpFilterEntry 1)Applicable to SU only. An IP address of an IP Filter Table entry. IP Address*MaskID710.3.3.2.2.1.2 (*IpFilterEntry 2)Applicable to SU only. An IP Mask of an IP Filter Table entry.Either a mask or a range, but not both can be used to define an address group.IP Address*IpFilterRange710.3.3.2.2.1.3 (*IpFilterEntry 3)Applicable to SU only. An addresses range for the IP Filter Table entry. The first address in the range is the IP address (*iPID).Either a mask or a range, but not both can be used to define an address group.Integer 0 - 255*IpFilterIdx710.3.3.2.2.1.4 (*IpFilterEntry 4)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. A table index for the IP Filter Table entry. Integer 1-8*DeleteOneUserFilter710.3.3.2.3 (*UserFilterParams 3)Applicable to SU only. Deletes a single selected entry from the IP Filter Table. Integer off (0)firstEntry (1)secondEntry (2)thirdEntry (3)fourthEntry (4)fifthEntry (5)sixthEntry (6)seventhEntry (7)eighthEntry (8)na (255)*DeleteAllUserFilters710.3.3.2.4 (*UserFilterParams 4)Applicable to SU only. Deletes all entries from the IP Filter Table. Integer off (0)deleteAll (1)off (2)na (255)
B-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Network Management ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*NwMngParameters710.3.3. 4(brzAccessMib 4)Network Management parameters.*AccessToNwMng710.3.3. 4.1 (*NwMngParameters 1)Applicable to AU and SU. The port to be used for remote management.wlanOnly: Management E from Wireless port only.ethOnly: Management enabled from Ethernet port only.bothWlanEth: Management enabled from both Wireless and Ethernet ports.IntegerwlanOnly (0)ethOnly (1)bothWlanEth (2)na (255)*NwMngFilter710.3.3. 4.2 (*NwMngParameters 2)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Disables or enables IP address based filtering of management messages (SNMP/Telnet/TFTP) on one of the ports, or on both ports.In GU only disable and activateOnEthPort options are available.Integer disable (0)activateOnEthPort (1)activateOnWlanPort (2)activateOnBothWlanAndEth(3)na (255) mngIpFilterTable710.3.3. 4.3 (*NwMngParameters 3)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A Management IP Filter Table of up to 3 IP addresses of devices that are authorized to access the unit for management purposes. Not accessible.mngIpFilterEntry710.3.3. 4.3.1 (mngIpFilterTable 1)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A Management IP Filter Table entry. Not accessible.*NwMngIpAddress710.3.3. 4.3.1.1 (mngIpFilterEntry 1)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. An IP address in the Management IP Filter Table.IP address*NwMngIpTableIdx710.3.3. 4.3.1.2 (mngIpFilterEntry 2)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Read-only. A table index for an entry in the Management IP Filter Table.Integer 1-3*DeleteOneNwIpAddr710.3.3. 4.4 (*NwMngParameters 4)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes a single selected entry from the Management IP Filter Table.Integer off (0)firstEntry (1secondEntry (2)thirdEntry (3)na (255)*DeleteAllNwIpAddrs710.3.3. 4.5 (*NwMngParameters 5)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes all entries from the Management IP Filter Table.Integer off (0)on (1)na (255)*AccessToNwTrap 710.3.3. 4.6 (*NwMngParameters 6)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Enables or disables sending of SNMP traps. Integer disable (0)enable (1)mngTrapTable710.3.3. 4.7 (*NwMngParameters 7)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A Management Trap Table of up to 3 IP addresses of devicess to send traps to. Not accessible.mngTrapEntry 710.3.3. 4.7.1 (mngTrapTable 1) Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A Management Trap Table entry. Not accessible.*NwMngTrapCommunity710.3.3. 4.7.1.1(mngTrapEntry 1)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. The trap community associated with the applicable entry in the Management Trap Table.DisplayString (SIZE(14))Up to 14 printable ASCII characters, case sensitive.*NwMngTrapAddress710.3.3. 4.7.1.2 (mngTrapEntry 2)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. An IP address in the Management Trap Table entry. IP address
Appendix B B-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*NwMngTrapTableIdx710.3.3. 4.7.1.3 (mngTrapEntry 3)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Read only. Tables Index for an entry in the Management Trap Table.Integer1-3*DeleteOneTrapAddr710.3.3. 4.8 (*NwMngParameters 8)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes a single selected entry from the Management Trap Table.Integeroff (0)firstEntry (1)secondEntry (2)thirdEntry (3)na (255)*DeleteAllTrapAddrs 710.3.3. 4.7.9 (*NwMngParameters 9)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes all entries from the Management Trap Table. Integer0=off1=on2=off255=na
B-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Bridge ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*BridgeParameters710.3.3. 5(brzAccessMib.5)Bridge parameters.*EthBroadcastFiltering710.3.3. 5.1 (*BridgeParameters 1)Applicable to SU only.Enables/disables the filtering of Ethernet (layer2) broadcasts.disable: No filtering.ethOnly: Filter broadcasts received on the Ethernet port only.wlanOnly: Filter broadcasts received on the Wlan port only.bothWlanAndEth: Filter broadcasts received on both ports.Integerdisable (0)ethOnly (1)wlanOnly (2)bothWlanAndEth(3)na (255)*VLANSupport710.3.3. 5.2 (*BridgeParameters 2)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. VLAN Support Parameters.*VlanID710.3.3. 5.2.1 (*VLANSupport 1)Applicable to SU only. VLAN ID for data frame tagging. Applicable to Access Link only. Integer 1-4094. 0 means not applicable*EthernetLinkType710.3.3. 5.2.2 (*VLANSupport 2)Applicable to AU and SU. VLAN support mode (Link Type). The Access Link option is not available for AU.Integer accessLink (1)trunkLink (2)hybridLink (3)*ManagementVID 710.3.3. 5.2.5 (*VLANSupport 5)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. VLAN ID for management frame tagging. For SUs with voice support it is also used for tagging voice frames (RTP packets).Integer 1-409465535 means no VLAN tagging. *VoicePriorityTag710.3.3. 5.2.6 (*VLANSupport 6)Applicable to SU with voice only. Enables prioritization tagging of voice (RTP) frames according to IEEE 802.1p when *ManagementVID is 65535 (No VLAN).Integer disable (0)enable (1)na (255)*VLANForwarding710.3.3. 5.2.7(*VLANSupport 7)VLAN Forwarding Feature Parameters*VlanForwardingSupport710.3.3. 5.2.7.1(*VLANForwarding 1)Applicable to AU and SU. Enables or disables VLAN Forwarding. (applicable in Trunk links only)Integer disable (0)enable (1)na (255)*VlanForwardingTable 710.3.3. 5.2.7.2 (*VLANForwarding 2)Applicable to AU and SU. A VLAN Forwarding Table of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames are forwarded when VLAN Forwarding is Enabled. (applicable in Trunk links only). Not accessible.*VlanForwardingEntry 710.3.3. 5.2.7.2.1 (*VlanForwardingTable 1)Applicable to AU and SU. A VLAN Forwarding Table entry. (applicable in Trunk links only). Not accessible.*VlanForwardingIdx710.3.3. 5.2.7.2.1.1 (*VlanForwardingEntry 1)Applicable to AU and SU. A read only table index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Forwarding Table.Integer 0 - 19*VlanIdForwarding 710.3.3. 5.2.7.2.1.2 (*VlanForwardingEntry 2)Applicable to AU and SU. The list of VLAN ID's in the VLAN ID Forwarding Table. To Remove a VLAN ID - SET the corresponding entry to 0. To Add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is currently 0.Integer 1-40940=remove entry.*VLANRelaying710.3.3. 5.2.8(*VLANSupport 8)VLAN Relaying Feature Parameters
Appendix B B-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*VlanRelayingSupport710.3.3. 5.2.8.1(*VLANRelaying 1)Applicable to AU only. Enables or disables VLAN Relaying. (applicable in Trunk links only)Integer disable (0)enable (1)na (255)*VlanRelayingTable 710.3.3. 5.2.8.2 (*VLANRelaying 2)Applicable to AU only. A VLAN Relaying Table of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames are relayed when VLAN Relaying is Enabled. (applicable in Trunk links only). Not accessible.*VlanRelayingEntry710.3.3. 5.2.8.2.1 (*VlanRelayingTable 1)Applicable to AU only. A VLAN Relaying Table entry. (applicable in Trunk links only). Not accessible.*VlanRelayingIdx 710.3.3. 5.2.8.2.1.1 (*VlanRelayingEntry) 1Applicable to AU only. A read only table index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Relaying Table. Integer 0 - 19*VlanIdRelaying710.3.3. 5.2.8.2.1.2 (*VlanRelayingEntry 2)Applicable to AU only. The list of VLAN ID's in the VLAN ID Relaying Table. To Remove a VLAN ID - SET the corresponding entry to 0. To Add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is currently 0.Integer 1-40940=remove entry.*VLANTrafficPriority710.3.3. 5.2.9 (*VLANSupport 9)VLAN Traffic Priority Parameters*VlanDataPriority 710.3.3. 5.2.9.1 (*VLANTrafficPriority 1)Applicable to SU only.Priority tagging for data frames. Applicable to Access Link only.Integer 0 – 7na (255)*VlanVoicePriority 710.3.3. 5.2.9.2 (*VLANTrafficPriority 2)Applicable to SU with voice only. Priority tagging for voice frames. Applicable to Access Link and Trunk Link only.Integer 0 – 7na (255)*VlanManagementPriority710.3.3. 5.2.9.3 (*VLANTrafficPriority 3)Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Priority tagging for management frames. Applicable to units with a *ManagementVID other than 65535.Integer 0 – 7na (255)*PriorityQueueThreshold 710.3.3. 5.2.9.4 (*VLANTrafficPriority 4)Applicable to AU and SU. Priority threshold for tagged frames received from Ethernet port. Applicable to Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only.Integer 0 – 7na (255)*BridgeAgingTime710.3.3. 5.3 (*BridgeParameters 3)Applicable to AU and SU. Bridge aging time for devices learned from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports. Integer 100 – 2000(seconds) *LanToWirelessLinkBridgeMode 710.3.3. 5.4 (*BridgeParameters 4)Applicable to AU only.Controls the flow of information from Ethernet to Wlan. rejectUnknown: Permits only transmission to addresses known to be on the Wlan side. forwardUnknown: Forwards all frames, except those sent to addresses known to be on the Ethernet side.Integer rejectUnknown (0)forwardUnknown (1)na (255)*BroadcastRelaying710.3.3. 5.5 (*BridgeParameters 5)Applicable to AU only.Enables/disables the relaying of broadcast messages to the wireless link.Integer disable (0)enable (1)na (255)*UnicastRelaying710.3.3. 5.6 (*BridgeParameters 6)Applicable to AU only.Enables/disables the relaying of unicast messages to the wireless link.Integer disable (0)enable (1)na (255)*EthBroadcastingParameters710.3.3. 5.7 (*BridgeParameters 7)Applicable to SU only. Ethernet Broadcasting parameters. *DHCPBroadcastOverrideFilter710.3.3. 5.7.1(*EthBroadcastingParameters 1)Applicable to SU only. Enables or disables the broadcasting of DHCP messages, overriding the general *EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option Integer no (0)yes (1)na (255)* PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFilter710.3.3. 5.7.2 (*EthBroadcastingParameters 2)Applicable to SU only. Enables or disables the broadcasting of PPPoE messages, overriding the general *EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option.Integer no (0)yes (1)na (255)
B-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01* ARPBroadcastOverrideFilter710.3.3. 5.7.3 (*EthBroadcastingParameters 3)Applicable to SU only. Enables or disables the broadcasting of ARP messages, overriding the general *EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option.Integer no (0)yes (1)na (255)*ToSPriorityParameters 710.3.3. 5.8(*BridgeParameters 8)*VoicePacketsToS 710.3.3. 5.8.1 (*ToSPriorityParameters 1)Applicable to SU with voice only.The Type of Service value to be inserted in the IP header of voice (RTP) packets.Integer 0-255*ToSPrecedenceThreshold 710.3.3. 5.8.2 (*ToSPriorityParameters 2)Applicable to SU and AU only. Priority threshold (based on the ToS) for frames received from Ethernet port.Integer 0-7
Appendix B B-11BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualAir Interface Parameters MIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*AirInterface710.3.3. 6 (brzAccessMib 6)*ESSID 710.3.3. 6.1 (*AirInterface 1)Applicable to SU and AU. The Extended Service Set ID (ESSID) used to prevent the merging of collocated systems. Accessible only with SNMP Write Community.DisplayString (SIZE(31))Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII characters.*AckDelayLimit710.3.3. 6.2 (*AirInterface 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Defines the maximum time the unit waits for an Acknowledgment (ACK) message before retransmission. Defining a higher range causes the unit to wait a longer time for ACKs before retransmission.Low: Up to 10kmMedium: Up to 20kmHigh: Greater than 20km. IntegerLow (0)Medium (1)High (2)na (255)*FreqOffset710.3.3. 6.3 (*AirInterface 3)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS XL family. Not applicable to units that support only Flexible Hopping Definition for setting the hopping frequencies (e.g. 3.3a band). Not applicable in Flexible Hopping Definition mode. Determines the beginning of the actual hopping band or single channel frequency relative to the beginning of the radio band. Start of hopping band (channel) = Start of radio band+2 X Frequency OffsetIntegerna (255)The valid range of values is dependent on the bandwidth of the radio and on the selected Hopping Band.Max. Frequency Offset = [Overall radio bandwidth-Hopping Band]/2*TransmitDiversity710.3.3. 6.4 (*AirInterface 4)Applicable to SU-R, SU-I and AU-I units only. Enables the selection of the antenna(s) to be used for transmission.Integeruse2Antennasn (0)antenna1 (1)antenna2 (2)na (255) *HoppingSequence710.3.3. 6.5 (*AirInterface 5)Applicable to AU in BreezeACCESS II family only.Determines the hopping sequence to be used. Different AUs in the same geographical area should use different Hopping Sequences from the same Hopping Set. The valid range is dependant on the Country Standard.IntegerNa (255)Australia: 1-20Canada: 1-10Europe ETSI: 1-26France: 1-11Israel: 1-11Japan: 1-4Korea: 1-4Netherlands: 1-5Spain: 1-9US FCC: 1-26Mexico: 1-10International: 1-26 *HoppingSet710.3.3. 6.6 (*AirInterface 6)Applicable to AU in BreezeACCESS II family only.Determines the hopping set to be used. All AUs in the same geographical area should use the same Hopping Set.Integer1-3na (255)
B-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*HoppingSync710.3.3. 6.7 (*AirInterface 7)Applicable to BS-AU only.Inter-AU hopping sync functionality of the unit. In the BreezeACCESS II family, synchronization among AUs is not available with the following Country Standards: US FCC, Australia, Canada.In the BreezeACCESS V family, synchronization is not available if the selected hopping band is ISM US FCC.Integeridle (0)slave (1)master (2)na (255)*HoppingShift710.3.3. 6.8 (*AirInterface 8)Applicable to AU in BreezeACCESS V, XL and MMDS families and in BreezeACCESS II if *HoppingBands is frqFlexibleHopping.Defines a hopping pattern different from the basic hopping sequence (Hopping Shift=0). Different collocated AUs should use different hopping shifts. Integerna (255)Range 0 to [number of operational channels-1]
Appendix B B-13BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*HoppingBands710.3.3. 6.9 (*AirInterface 9)Applicable to SU and AU only. In BreezeACCESS II this is read-only, showing the Country Standard set in the factory. In BreezeACCESS MMDS it is read-only, showing Flexible Hopping Definition.In BreezeACCESS XL products that support only Flexible Hopping Definition for setting the hopping frequencies (e.g. 3.3a band), it is read-only, showing Flexible Hopping Definition. In other BreezeACCESS XL products, supporting the use of the Hopping Band parameter for setting the hopping frequencies, this is read-write, enabling the selection of a fixed Hopping Band, Single Channel operation or Flexible Hopping Definition.In BreezeACCESS V units that are configured to support only ISM US FCC hopping standard, it is read-only. Otherwise it is read-write, supporting the selection of ISM US FCC, ISM International and Flexible Hopping Definition,Integerna (255)The available values represent settings that are dependent on the specific radio band.BreezeACCESS II (read only):frqSiteProprietary (3)frqISMEuropeETSI (4)frqISMUsFCC (5)frqISMJapan (6)frqISMKorea (7)frqISMAustralia (8)frqISMIsrael (9)frqISMNetherlands (11)frqISMFrance (12)frqISMSpain (13)frqISMCanada (14)frqInternational (22)frqFlexibleHopping (37)frqSingleChannel2_4GHz (41)frqISMMexico (67)MMDS (read only): frqFlexibleHopping (37)BreezeACCESS 2.6b:frqFlexibleHopping (37)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence10MHz (44)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence12MHz (45)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence14MHz (46)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence24MHz (47)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence28MHz (48)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence36MHz (49)frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence42MHz (50)frqSingleChannel2_6Ghz (51)BreezeACCESS 3.3a, 3.6b: (read only)frqFlexibleHopping (37) BreezeACCESS 3.5a:frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence10MHz (15)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence12MHz (16)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence14MHz (17)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MHz (18)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence28MHz (19)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence36MHz (20)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence42MHz (21)frqFlexibleHopping (37)frqSingleChannel3_5GHz (40)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprietary(69)BreezeACCESS 3.5a1:frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence10MHz (23)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence12MHz (24)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence14MHz (25)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence24MHz (26)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence28MHz (27)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence36MHz (28)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence42MHz (29)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence50MHz (33)frqFlexibleHopping (37)frqSingleChannel3_5a1GHz (39)frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprietary(70)BreezeACCESS 3.5b, 3.5ab:frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence10MHz (15)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence12MHz (16)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence14MHz (17)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MHz (18)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence28MHz (19)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence36MHz (20)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence42MHz (21)frq3_5bGHzHoppingSequence50MHz (32)frqFlexibleHopping (37)frqSingleChannel3_5GHz (40)frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprietary(69)BreezeACCESS 3.8:frq3_8GHzBand1 (0)frq3_8GHzSelectable (1)frq3_8GHzApprovalSpectrumMask (2)frqFlexibleHopping (37)frqSingleChannel3_8GHz (42)BreezeACCESS Vfrg5_7GHzISMUsFCC(74)frg5_7GHzInternational(75)frg5_7GHzFlexibleHopping(37)
B-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*MaxDataRate710.3.3. 6.10 (*AirInterface 10)Applicable to SU and AU. The maximum transmission data rate. Integermax1Mbps (1)max2Mbps (2)max3Mbps (3)na (255)*TransmitPowerControl 710.3.3. 6.11 (*AirInterface 11)Applicable to IF based units (AU-A/E and SU-A/E) only. Enables reducing the transmit power level. The maximum available value is for maximum power. A lower value reduces the transmitted power. The resulting transmit power level depends on the maximum power supported by the unit and on the attenuation of the IF cable.IntegerBreezeACCESS II, XL and MMDS: 0-15BreezeACCESS V: 0-7na (255)*RxAttenuationControl 710.3.3. 6.12 (*AirInterface 12)Applicable to IF-based SU (SU-A/E) only.Enables to set the attenuation in the receive path to 0, 10 or 25dB. The effect of inserting such attenuation in the receive circuit is equivalent to reducing the level of the received signal (including both signal and noise) by 2dB when selecting 10dB attenuation and 12dB when selecting 25dB attenuation.Integerlow0dB (0)med10dB (1)high25dB (2)na (255)*MaximumVoiceSessions 710.3.3. 6.14 (*AirInterface 14)Applicable to AU only.The maximum number of simultaneous voice sessions permitted to guarantee minimum quality. Integer0-50na (255)*FlexSubBandDef 710.3.3. 6.15 (*AirInterface 15)Applicable to SU and AU only. Flexible Hopping Definition parameters.*AddSubBand 710.3.3. 6.15.1 (*FlexSubBandDef 1)Applicable to SU and AU only.In BreezeACCESS II, V and MMDS families it adds sub-bands (f1-f2) or discrete frequencies to the list of sub-bands/frequencies to be used for generating the basic Hopping Sequence after the next reset.In BreezeACCESS XL it defines a new set of sub-bands/frequencies to be used for generating the basic Hopping Sequence after the next reset. DisplayString (SIZE(244))Up to 244 printable ASCII characters.Use either MHZ resolution ìaaaaî or kHz resolution ìaaaa.bbbî. Use a hyphen between two entries defining a sub-band. Use a comma between sub-bands and/or discrete frequency entries. Do not use spaces.*DelSubBand 710.3.3. 6.15.2 (*FlexSubBandDef 2)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS II, V and MMDS families only.Deletes sub-bands (f1-f2) or discrete frequencies from the list of sub-bands/frequencies to be used for generating the basic Hopping Sequence after the next reset.DisplayString (SIZE(244))Up to 244 printable ASCII characters.Use either MHZ resolution ìaaaaî or kHz resolution ìaaaa.bbbî. Use a hyphen between two entries defining a sub-band. Use a comma between sub-bands and/or discrete frequency entries. Do not use spaces.*ErazeAllSubBands 710.3.3. 6.15.3 (*FlexSubBandDef 3)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS II, V and MMDS families only.Deletes all entries from the table of the frequencies to be used.IntegereraseAll (0)noOperation (1)na (255)*SubBandTable 710.3.3. 6.15.4(*FlexSubBandDef 4)Applicable to SU and AU only. The list of sub-bands to be supported after next reset. Not accessible.*SubBandEntry 710.3.3. 6.15.4.1 (*SubBandTable 1)Applicable to SU and AU only. A Sub-Band Table entry. Not accessible.*SubBand 710.3.3. 6.15.4.1.1 (*SubBandEntry 1)Applicable only to SW version 2.6.Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A Sub-Band in the Sub-Bands Table.Integer
Appendix B B-15BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*SubBandsTableIdx710.3.3. 6.15.4.1.2 (*SubBandEntry 2)Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A Sub-Band Table entry index.Integer*SubBandExp710.3.3. 6.15.4.1.3 (*SubBandEntry 3)Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A Sub-Band in the Sub-Bands Table.DisplayString (SIZE(10))*CurrentHoppingSeqTable 710.3.3. 6.15.5(*FlexSubBandDef 5)Applicable to SU and AU only. The list of hopping frequencies in the Current Hopping Sequence. Not accessible.*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry710.3.3. 6.15.5.1 (*CurrentHoppingSeqTable 1)Applicable to SU and AU only. A Current Hopping Sequence Table entry. Not accessible.*HopSeqSubBand710.3.3. 6.15.5.1.1 (*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 1)Applicable only to SW version 2.6.Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A frequency in the Current Hopping Sequence Table.Integer*CurrHopSeqTableIdx710.3.3. 6.15.5.1.2 (*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 2)Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A Current Hopping Sequence Table index.Integer*CurrSubBandExp710.3.3. 6.15.5.1.3 *CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 3)Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A frequency in the Current Hopping Sequence Table.DisplayString (SIZE(10))*ChannelSpacing710.3.3. 6.15.5 (*FlexSubBandDef 5)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS XL family only. Applicable only in Flexible Hopping Definition mode. Defines the minimum distances between two frequencies. (Not available in some products that only support a 2MHz Channel Spacing)Integerspace1_75MHz (0)space1MHz (1)space2MHz (2)na (255)*AddFlexHopChannels710.3.3. 6.15.7(*FlexSubBandDef 7)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS MMDS family only.Adds MMDS channels to the list of channels to be used. DisplayString (SIZE(244))Up to 244 printable ASCII characters in one of the following formats:1. A12. B2,C3,G4 (no spaces)*DelFlexHopChannels710.3.3. 6.15.8 (*FlexSubBandDef 8)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS MMDS family only.Deletes MMDS channels from the list of channels to be used.DisplayString (SIZE(244))Up to 244 printable ASCII characters in one of the following formats:1. A12. B2,C3,G4 (no spaces)*ScramblingDefinition710.3.3. 6.15.9 (*FlexSubBandDef 9)Applicable to SU and AU. Scrambling parameters.*ScramblingMode710.3.3. 6.15.9.1(*ScramblingDefinition 1)Applicable to SU and AU. The method of scrambling the frequencies defined in the Flexible Hopping Definition process for generating the basic hopping sequence. Standard mode - this mode automatically scrambles the frequencies according to the algorithm used in SW version 3.x and lower. It is suitable for up to 6 frequencies.Enhanced mode - this mode automatically scrambles the frequencies according to a new algorithm. Manual mode - The user defines the hopping sequence using the frequencies indexes.IntegerstandardMode (1) manualMode (2) enhancedMode(3)*ManualSequenceDefinition710.3.3. 6.15.9.2(*ScramblingDefinition 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Manual scrambling definition. Configuring the sequence using the frequenciesí indexes. Display String. Up to 244 printable ASCII characters.Allowed Range of Indexes: '1' to 'Number of Channels'.Sequence Length must be equal to 'Number of Channels'.Use a comma to separate between entries.
B-16 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*EraseManualSequence710.3.3. 6.15.9.3(*ScramblingDefinition 3)Applicable to SU and AU. Erase the manually configured sequence. IntegercancelOperation (0)eraseAll (1)*SpanningFactor710.3.3. 6.15.9.4(*ScramblingDefinition 4)Applicable to AU only. The Spanning Factor to be used by the Enhanced Scrambling mechanism. The Spanning Factor should be chosen so that the GCD (Greater Common Divisor) of the Spanning Factor and the Number of Frequencies would be 1 (e.g. for 8 frequencies possible values for the Spanning Factor are 1, 3, 5 and 7). The SU learns the value of the Spanning Factor from the AU.IntegerFrom 1 to ‘Number of Frequencies’, provided it meets the GCD requirement.*ScrambledSeqTable 710.3.3. 6.15.9.5(*ScramblingDefinition 5)Applicable to SU and AU only. The scrambled sequence to be supported after next reset. Not accessible.*ScrambledSeqEntry 710.3.3. 6.15. 9.5.1(*ScrambledSeqTable 1)Applicable to SU and AU only. A Scrambled Sequence Table entry. Not accessible.*ScrambledSeqTableIdx710.3.3. 6.15. 9.5.1.1(**ScrambledSeqEntry 1)Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A Scrambled Sequence Table entry index.Integer*ScrambledSeqFreqIdx710.3.3. 6.15. 9.5.1.2(**ScrambledSeqEntry 2)Applicable to SU and AU only. Read-only. A Frequency Index in the Scrambled Sequence Table.DisplayString (SIZE(10))*CallAgingTime710.3.3. 6.16 (*AirInterface 16)Applicable to AU only. The aging time for a voice call in the Call Info database.Integer1-50,000 (seconds)1=No aging*SecurityParameters710.3.3. 6.17 (*AirInterface 17)Security Parameters*PrivacyOptionImplemented710.3.3. 6.17.1(*SecurityParameters 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Read Only. Enable/disable the privacy option. Normally set to active.IntegernotActive (0)active (1)*AuthenticationAlgorithm 710.3.3. 6.17.2 (*SecurityParameters 2)Applicable to SU and AU only. Enables/disables the authentication option.openSystem: authentication messages are not encrypted.sharedKey: Authentication messages are encrypted.IntegeropenSystem (0)sharedKey (1)*DefaultKeyID 710.3.3. 6.17.3 (*SecurityParameters 3)Applicable to SU and AU only. The ID of the key to be used for encryption the authentication messages.Integer1-4*WEPKey1710.3.3. 6.17.4 (*SecurityParameters 4)Applicable to SU and AU only. Encryption WEP Key#1. Accessible only with SNMP Write Community.DisplayString (SIZE(10))Ten hexadecimal digits*WEPKey2710.3.3. 6.17.5 (*SecurityParameters 5)Applicable to SU and AU only. Encryption WEP Key#2. Accessible only with SNMP Write Community.DisplayString (SIZE(10))Ten hexadecimal digits*WEPKey3710.3.3. 6.17.6 (*SecurityParameters 6)Applicable to SU and AU only. Encryption WEP Key#3. Accessible only with SNMP Write Community.DisplayString (SIZE(10))Ten hexadecimal digits*WEPKey4710.3.3. 6.17.7 (*SecurityParameters 7)Applicable to SU and AU only. Encryption WEP Key#4. Accessible only with SNMP Write Community.DisplayString (SIZE(10))Ten hexadecimal digits.
Appendix B B-17BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*CurrentTxPwrLvl 710.3.3. 6.18 (*AirInterface 18)Applicable to SU-R, SU-I and AU-I units only. Enables setting the transmitted power level according to the unit capabilities.The medium (2) value is not applicable to SU-I and AU-I and to some SU-R products. IntegerLow (0)high (1)medium (2)*WirelessTrapThreshold710.3.3. 6.19(*AirInterface 19)A wireless link quality threshold for sending the *WirelessStatusTRAP,or *WirelessStatusOfSUsTRAP.These traps indicate whether the quality has gone below or above the specified threshold.IntegerSU: 0-255 (RSSI units)AU: 0-100 (% retransmissions)*NumberOfHoppingFrequenciess710.3.3. 6.20(*AirInterface 20)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The Number of Hopping Frequencies used in the AU.Integer0-99na (255)*OperatorESSID710.3.3. 6.21(*AirInterface 21)Applicable to AU only. A secondary ESSID to support upgrade of existing installations. All AUs in the region should be configured to the same Operator ESSID to allow a new SU to associate with any AU.DisplayString (SIZE(31))Up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case sensitive.*RunTimeESSID710.3.3. 6.22(*AirInterface 22)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. The ESSID of the associated AU. DisplayString (SIZE(31))Up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case sensitive.*BestAu710.3.3. 6.23(*AirInterface 23)Best AU Parameters*BestAuSupport710.3.3. 6.23.1(*BestAu 1)Applicable to SU only. Disable/enable the Best AU selection mechanism.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts710.3.3. 6.23.2(*BestAu 2)Applicable to SU only. The number of scanning attempts to collect information for the Best AU decision.Integer1 – 255*NeighborAuTable710.3.3. 6.23.3(*BestAu 3)Applicable to SU only. A table of data on neighboring AUs. Not accessible.*NeighborAuEntry710.3.3. 6.23.3.1(*NeighborAuTable 1)Applicable to SU only. An entry in the Neighbor AU Table. Not accessible.*NeighborAuMacAdd710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.1(*NeighborAuEntry 1)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. A MAC address of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table.MAC address*NeighborAuESSID710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.2(*NeighborAuEntry 2)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. The ESSID of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table.DisplayString (SIZE(31))Up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case sensitive.*NeighborAuRssi710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.3(*NeighborAuEntry 3)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. The received signal strength in RSSI units of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table.Integer*NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.4(*NeighborAuEntry 4)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Neighbor AU association load status in the Neighbor AU Table.IntegernotFull (0)full (1)na (255)*NeighborAuMark710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.5(*NeighborAuEntry 5)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Neighbor AU mark in the Neighbor AU Table.Integer*NeighborAuIdx710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.6(*NeighborAuEntry 6)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. An index of an entry in the Neighbor AU Table.Integer
B-18 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*NeighborAuDbm710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.7(*NeighborAuEntry 7)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. The received signal strength in dBm of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table.Integer*PreferredAuMacAddress710.3.3. 6.23.5(*BestAu 5)Applicable to SU only. The MAC address of the preferred AU (overriding the Best AU selection process. 00...00 (all zeros in address) means no preferred AU is set.MAC Address*TransmitLevel710.3.3. 6.24(*AirInterface 24)For future use in SU-I and AU-I. Sets the level in dBm of the transmitted power at the antenna port.Integer0-21na (255)*ACSEParameters710.3.3. 6.27(*AirInterface 27)Applicable for AU, SU and GU. ACSE Voice Scheduler parameters.*ACSEOption710.3.3. 6.27.1(*ACSEParameters 1)Applicable for AU, SU and GU. Read-only in the SU. Disable/enable the ACSE Voice Scheduler mechanism.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)*ACSEDwellTime710.3.3. 6.27.2(*ACSEParameters 2)Applicable for AU, SU and GU. Read-only. The dwell time when the *ACSEOption is enabled. Currently set to 60 milliseconds.Integer60 (mseconds)na (255)*ACSEMaximumVoiceSessions710.3.3. 6.27.3(*ACSEParameters 3)Applicable to AU only.The maximum number of simultaneous ACSE voice sessions permitted to guarantee minimum quality. Applicable only when the *ACSEOption is enabled.Integer0-15na (255)*ACSENumberOfDataRetransmissions710.3.3. 6.27.4(*ACSEParameters 4)Applicable to SU and AU. Maximum times to retransmit an unacknowledged data packet. Applicable only when the *ACSEOption is enabled.Integer0-100*ACSENumberOfVoiceRetransmissions710.3.3. 6.27.5(*ACSEParameters 5)Applicable to SU with voice and AU. Maximum times to retransmit an unacknowledged voice packet. Applicable only when the *ACSEOption is enabled.Integer0-100*OperatorESSIDOption710.3.3. 6.28(*AirInterface 28)Applicable for AU only. The Enabling/disabling the use of the Operator ESSID.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*MaxNumOfAssociations710.3.3. 6.29(*AirInterface 29)Sets the upper limit for the number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the AU.Integer0-512* SiteProprietary710.3.3. 6.31(*AirInterface 31)Site Proprietary parameters. Applicable only to BreezeACCESS II SU and AU configured to work in the special Site Proprietary hopping standard.*SPNumOfFreqs710.3.3. 6.31.1(* SiteProprietary 1)Number of frequencies in the proprietary hopping sets parameters.*FirstSetNumOfFreqs710.3.3. 6.31.1.1(*SPNumOfFreqs 1)Read-Only. Number of frequencies in the first set. Integerna (255)*SecondSetNumOfFreqs710.3.3. 6.31.1.2(*SPNumOfFreqs 2)Read-Only. Number of frequencies in the second set. Integerna (255)*ThirdSetNumOfFreqs710.3.3. 6.31.1.3(*SPNumOfFreqs 3)Read-Only. Number of frequencies in the third set. Integerna (255)
Appendix B B-19BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*SPFreqs710.3.3. 6.31.2(* SiteProprietary 2)Site Proprietary frequencies parameters.*SPFreqsTable710.3.3. 6.31.2.1(*SPFreqs 1)A table of frequencies in the Site Proprietary hopping sets. Not accessible.sPFreqsEntry710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1(*SPFreqsTable 1)An entry in the table of frequencies in the Site Proprietary hopping sets. Not accessible.sPFreqIdx710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.1(sPFreqsEntry 1)A index of an entry in the able of frequencies in the Site Proprietary hopping sets. Read Only.IntegersPFirstSetFreq710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.2(sPFreqsEntry 2)A frequency in the first Site Proptietary hopping set. Read Only. IntegersPSecondSetFreq710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.3(sPFreqsEntry 3)A frequency in the second Site Proptietary hopping set. Read Only. IntegersPThirdSetFreq710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.3(sPFreqsEntry 3)A frequency in the third Site Proptietary hopping set. Read Only. Integer
B-20 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Performance ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*PerformanceParams710.3.3. 7(brzAccessMib 7)*NumOfRetransmissions710.3.3. 7.1(*PerformanceParams 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Maximum times to retransmit an unacknowledged packet. Applicable only when the *ACSEOption is disabled.Integer0-100*NumOfDwellToRetransmit 710.3.3. 7.2 (*PerformanceParams 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Minimum dwell periods during which an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted. Integer0-9 *NumOfRetransToDecRate710.3.3. 7.3 (*PerformanceParams 3)Applicable to SU and AU. Number of unsuccessful retransmissions to decrease the transmission rate.Integer0-10 *MinContentionWin 710.3.3. 7.5 (*PerformanceParams 5)Applicable to SU and AU. Determines the size of the contention window, which is the time to wait before transmission for collision avoidance.Integer7-255. *MaxMulticastRate 710.3.3. 7.6 (*PerformanceParams 6)Applicable to SU and AU. Maximum rate for transmission of multicast and broadcast messages.Integermax1Mbps (1)max2Mbps (2)max3Mbps (3)na (255)*CarrierSenseLevel 710.3.3. 7.7 (*PerformanceParams 7)Applicable to SU and AU. Threshold level for decision on existence of a carrier signal, indicating a transmission from another unit.DisplayString -255 to +255 (dB)*DwellTime 710.3.3. 7.9 (*PerformanceParams 9)Applicable to AU and GU.The time spent on each radio channel (hop). Applicable only when the *ACSEOption is disabled.Integert32KiloMicroseconds(32)t64KiloMicroseconds(64)t128KiloMicroseconds(128)na (255)*RTSThreshold710.3.3. 7.10 (*PerformanceParams 10)Applicable to SU and AU. The minimum frame size that requires an RTS/CTS handshake.Integer20-1600 (bytes)*MultiRate 710.3.3. 7.11 (*PerformanceParams 11)Applicable to SU and AU. Multi-Rate parameters*MultiRateSupport710.3.3. 7.11.1 (*MultiRate 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Enables/disables the multi-Rate decision mechanism.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*MultiRateDecisionWinSize710.3.3. 7.11.2 (*MultiRate 2)Applicable to SU and AU. The size of the decision window for the multi-Rate mechanism (the number of consecutive transmission or retransmission attempts).Integer1-50na (255)*NoOfFailuresInDecisionWindow710.3.3. 7.11.3 (*MultiRate 3)Applicable to SU and AU. The number of failures in the decision window that will cause the window to be defined as unsuccessful.Integer1 to Decision Window Size.na (255)*GpsHoppingParams710.3.3. 7.12(*PerformanceParams 12)GPS Hopping Parameters*NumberOfHoppingFreqs710.3.3. 7.12.1(*GpsHoppingParams 1)Applicable to GU Only. The Number of Hopping Frequencies used in the AUs controlled by the GU.Integer0-99na (255)
Appendix B B-21BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*SyncSignalSource710.3.3. 7.12.1(*GpsHoppingParams 2)Applicable to GU Only. The source of the synchronization signal.When using a single GU, it should always be configured to 1 (gPSAntennaOrInternal).When using several daisy-chained units and a GPS Antenna is connected to the first unit, than all units should be configured to 1 (gPSAntennaOrInternal). When using several daisy-chained units without a GPS antenna, than the first unit that generates the self-synchronization signals for all other units should be configured to 1 (gPS_AntennaOrInternal). All other units that receive the synchronization signals from the first unit should be configured to 2 (localFromOtherGU ).IntegergpsAntennaOrInternal (1)localFromOtherGU (2)na (255)
B-22 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Site Survey ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*SiteSurvey 710.3.3. 8(brzAccessMib 8)PerHopStatisticsTable710.3.3. 8.1 (*SiteSurvey 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Statistics accumulated since last reset and average RSSI per frequency for all hopping frequencies in the (sequence). Not Accessible.hopSeqEntry 710.3.3. 8.1.1 (perHopStatisticsTable 1)Applicable to SU and AU. A Per Hop Statistics Table entry. Not accessible.wPperHopStatisticsTable 710.3.3. 8.1.1.1 (hopSeqEntry 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The channel number according to the hopping sequence.IntegerhopTracerRx 710.3.3. 8.1.1.2 (hopSeqEntry 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The accumulated number of frames received since last reset at the applicable frequency.IntegerhopTracerTx 710.3.3. 8.1.1.3 (hopSeqEntry 3)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The accumulated number of frames transmitted since last reset at the applicable frequency.IntegerhopTracerRetries 710.3.3. 8.1.1.4 (hopSeqEntry 4)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The accumulated number of frames retransmitted since last reset at the applicable frequency.IntegerhopTracerRSSI 710.3.3. 8.1.1.5 (hopSeqEntry 5)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The average RSSI of frames received at the applicable frequency.DisplayString (SIZE(20))* hopTracerFreq710.3.3. 8.1.1.6 (hopSeqEntry 6)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The frequency in MHz of the entry. DisplayString (SIZE(9))*TrafficStatistics 710.3.3. 8.2 (*SiteSurvey 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Traffic Statistics parameters.*ResetTrafficCounters 710.3.3. 8.2.1 (*TrafficStatistics 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Resets the Ethernet Counters (*EthCounters) and the Wireless Link Counters (*WlanCounters).IntegernoReset (0)reset (1)*EthCounters710.3.3. 8.2.2 (*TrafficStatistics 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Ethernet counters.*TotalRxFramesViaEthernet 710.3.3. 8.2.2.1 (*EthCounters 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Total number of frames received via the Ethernet port. Counter*TxWirelessToEthernet 710.3.3. 8.2.2.2 (*EthCounters 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Total number of frames transmitted to the Ethernet port.Counter*WlanCounters710.3.3. 8.2.3 (*TrafficStatistics 3)Applicable to SU and AU. Wireless link counters.*TotalTxFramesToWireless710.3.3. 8.2.3.1 (*WlanCounters 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of frames transmitted to the wireless media. The count includes one count for each data or RTP frame that was transmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions), and also the number of transmitted control and management frames.Counter
Appendix B B-23BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*TotalRxFramesFromWireless710.3.3. 8.2.3.2 (*WlanCounters 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total number of frames that were received from the wireless media. The count includes data and control and management frames, including beacons received from the AU. The count does not include frames that were discarded internally, bad frames and duplicate frames.Counter *TotalRetransmittedFragments710.3.3. 8.2.3.3 (*WlanCounters 3)For future use Counter*WlanFramesDropped710.3.3. 8.2.3.4 (*WlanCounters 4)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of dropped frames. The frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged.Counter *TransmittedFramesToWirelessData710.3.3. 8.2.3.5 (*WlanCounters 5)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of data frames transmitted to the wireless media. The count includes one count for each data frame that was transmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions).Counter *TransmittedFramesToWirelessVoice710.3.3. 8.2.3.6 (*WlanCounters 6)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of voice frames, including fax and redundant T.38 frames, transmitted to the wireless media. The count includes one count for each frame that was transmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions).Counter *TransmittedFramesToWirelessBeacon710.3.3. 8.2.3.7 (*WlanCounters 7)Applicable to AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of beacons transmitted to the wireless media. The count includes one count for each beacon that was transmitted successfully (excluding retransmission attempts).Counter*TotalSubmittedFrames710.3.3. 8.2.3.8 (*WlanCounters 8)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total number of data and RTP frames submitted to the bridge for transmission to the wireless media. The count does not include control and management frames, and retransmissions. Counter*SubmittedFramesHigh710.3.3. 8.2.3.9 (*WlanCounters 9)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Counts the number of frames submitted to the bridge via the High queue for transmission to the wireless media. When the ACSE Option is enabled, it counts data and RTP frames. When the ACSE Option is disabled, it counts only data frames.Counter*SubmittedFramesMid710.3.3. 8.2.3.10 (*WlanCounters 10)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Counts the number of frames submitted to the bridge via the Mid queue for transmission to the wireless media. When the ACSE Option is enabled, it counts data and RTP frames. When the ACSE Option is disabled, it counts only data frames.Counter*SubmittedFramesLow710.3.3. 8.2.3.11 (*WlanCounters 11)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Counts the number of frames submitted to the bridge via the Low queue for transmission to the wireless media. When the ACSE Option is enabled, it counts data and RTP frames. When the ACSE Option is disabled, it counts only data frames.Counter*SubmittedFramesVoice710.3.3. 8.2.3.12 (*WlanCounters 12)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. Counts the number of voice frames, including fax and T.38 redundant frames, submitted to the bridge for transmission to the wireless media. Counter*FramesDroppedData710.3.3. 8.2.3.13 (*WlanCounters 13)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of dropped data frames. The data frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions for data frames without being acknowledged.Counter
B-24 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*FramesDroppedVoice710.3.3. 8.2.3.14 (*WlanCounters 14)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of dropped voice frames, including fax and T.38 redundant frames. The voice frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions for voice frames without being acknowledged.Counter*TotalRetransmittedFrames710.3.3. 8.2.3.15 (*WlanCounters 15)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total number of retransmissions of frames (counts all unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions).Counter*RetransmittedFramesData710.3.3. 8.2.3.16 (*WlanCounters 16)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The total number of retransmissions of data frames (counts all unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions).Counter*RetransmittedFramesVoice710.3.3. 8.2.3.17 (*WlanCounters 17)Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled. Read-only. The total number of retransmissions of voice frames, including fax and T.38 redundant frames (counts all unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions).Counter*TotalTxErrors710.3.3. 8.2.3.19(*WlanCounters 19)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred. Counter*TotalTxErrors710.3.3. 8.2.3.20Hw (*WlanCounters 20)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred due to an hardware problem.Counter*TotalTxErrorsAbr710.3.3. 8.2.3.21 (*WlanCounters 21)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because transmission has been aborted before completion due to internal problems in the DSP.Counter*TotalTxErrorsCsl710.3.3. 8.2.3.22 (*WlanCounters 22)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because transmission was cancelled due to the modem being busy receiving data.Counter*TotalTxErrorsAckTOut710.3.3. 8.2.3.23(*WlanCounters 23)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because of an Acknowledge Timeout–a frame that was not acknowledged within the time defined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter.Counter*TotalTxErrorsFail710.3.3. 8.2.3.24 (*WlanCounters 24)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because of an internal timeout in the modem.Counter*TotalTxErrorsAckCrc710.3.3. 8.2.3.25 (*WlanCounters 25)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because of a CRC error in the ACK message.Counter*TotalTxErrorsRtsc710.3.3. 8.2.3.26 (*WlanCounters 26)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because RTS was sent but CTS was not received (RTS collision).Counter*TotalTxErrorsEod710.3.3. 8.2.3.27 (*WlanCounters 27)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of transmit errors that have occurred because there was not enough time left to transmit the message prior to the end of the Dwell.Counter*TotalReceivedDataFrames710.3.3. 8.2.3.28 (*WlanCounters 28)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total number of data frames received from the wireless media, including duplicate frames.Counter*ReceivedDataFramesHigh710.3.3. 8.2.3.29(*WlanCounters 29)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total number of data frames received from the wireless media and routed via the receive High queue, including duplicate frames.Counter*ReceivedDataFramesLow710.3.3. 8.2.3.30(*WlanCounters 30)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total number of data frames received from the wireless media and routed via the receive Low queue, including duplicate frames.Counter
Appendix B B-25BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*BadFragmentsReceived710.3.3. 8.2.3.31 (*WlanCounters 31)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of frames received from the wireless media with errors (CRC errors).Counter*DuplicatedFramesDiscarded710.3.3. 8.2.3.32 (*WlanCounters 32)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of frames discarded due to receiving multiple copies. Counter*InternallyDiscardedMirCir710.3.3. 8.2.3.33 (*WlanCounters 33)Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum allowed information rate.Counter*VoiceCounters710.3.3. 8.2.4 (*TrafficStatistics 4)Applicable to SU with voice support only.*VoiceTrafficTxFrames710.3.3. 8.2.4.1 (*VoiceCounters 1)Applicable to SU with voice support only. Read-only. Counts the number of voice frames, including fax and T.38 redundant frames, that were transmitted to the wireless link.Counter*VoiceTrafficRxFrames710.3.3. 8.2.4.2 (*VoiceCounters 2)Applicable to SU with voice support only. Read-only. Counts the number of voice frames, including fax and T.38 redundant frames, that were received from the wireless link.Counter*VoiceTrafficTxBytes710.3.3. 8.2.4.3 (*VoiceCounters 3)Applicable to SU with voice support only. Read-only. Counts the number of voice bytes, including fax and T.38 redundant bytes, that were transmitted to the wireless link.Counter*VoiceTrafficRxBytes710.3.3. 8.2.4.4 (*VoiceCounters 4)Applicable to SU with voice support only. Read-only. Counts the number of voice bytes, including fax and T.38 redundant bytes, that were received from the wireless linkCounter*VoiceTrafficResetCounters710.3.3. 8.2.4.5 (*VoiceCounters 5)Applicable to SU with voice support only. Reset the voice counters. noReset (0)reset (1)na (255)*PerRateCounters710.3.3. 8.2.5 (*TrafficStatistics 5)Applicable to SU and AU.*ResetPerRateCounters710.3.3. 8.2.5.1(*PerRateCounters 1)Applicable to AU and SU. Resets the Per Rate Counters. noReset (0)reset (1)na (255)*PerRateCountersSU710.3.3. 8.2.5.2(*PerRateCounters 2)SU Per Rate Counters.*TxFrames1M710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.1(*PerRateCountersSU 1)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted over the wireless link at 1Mbps.Counter*TxFrames2M710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.2(*PerRateCountersSU 2)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted over the wireless link at 2Mbps.Counter*TxFrames3M710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.3(*PerRateCountersSU 3)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted over the wireless link at 3Mbps.Counter*ReTxFrames1M710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.4(*PerRateCountersSU 4)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted over the wireless link at 1Mbps.Counter*ReTxFrames2M710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.5(*PerRateCountersSU 5)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted over the wireless link at 2Mbps.Counter*ReTxFrames3M710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.6(*PerRateCountersSU 6)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted over the wireless link at 3Mbps.Counter
B-26 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*ReceivingUnits 710.3.3. 8.3 (*SiteSurvey 3)*AveragePower710.3.3. 8.3.1 (*ReceivingUnits 1)Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Represents the average Signal Strength of received frames. DisplayString (SIZE(32))*RssiOrDbm710.3.3. 8.3.2 (*ReceivingUnits 2)Applicable to SU and AU. Selects the measurement units used to display the average received signal strength.Integerrssi (0)dBm (1)*PerHopStatistics710.3.3. 8.4 (*SiteSurvey 4)Applicable to SU and AU.*ResetPerHopStatistics710.3.3. 8.4.1(*PerHopStatistics 1)Applicable to SU and AU. Reset the Per Hop Statistics counters. IntegernoReset (0)reset (1)*MacAddressDatabase 710.3.3. 8.5 (*SiteSurvey 5)Applicable to AU only. Database by MAC Addresses for all SUs associated with the AU. The databse include parameters learned by the AU from the SUs and some counters of wireless traffic between the AU and the relevant SU, as measured by the AU. *AdbResetAllCounters710.3.3. 8.5.1(*MacAddressDatabase 1)Applicable to AU only. To reset all the counters for all SUs in the MAC Address Database. This includes the following counters:*AdbTxFramesTotal*AdbTxFrames1M*AdbTxFrames2M*AdbTxFrames3M*AdbRTxFramesTotal*AdbRTxFrames1M*AdbRTxFrames2M*AdbRTxFrames3M*AdbTxDroppedFrames*AdbRxFramesTotalnoReset (0)reset (1)*AdbTable710.3.3. 8.5.2(*MacAddressDatabase 2)Applicable to AU Only. Not accessible. MAC Address Database table.*AdbEntry710.3.3. 8.5.2.1(*AdbTable 1)Applicable to AU Only. Not accessible. An entry in the MAC Address Database table.*AdbIndex710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.1(*AdbEntry 1)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The index of an entry in the MAC Address Database table. Integer*AdbMacAddress710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.2(*AdbEntry 2)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The MAC Address of an SU entry in the MAC Address Database table.MAC Address*AdbMaxRate710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.3(*AdbEntry 3)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the Maximum Data Rate parameter.Integer1, 2 or 3 (Mbps)*AdbCurrentTxRate710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.4(*AdbEntry 4)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The current transmit rate to the SU. Integer1, 2 or 3 (Mbps)*AdbTxFramesTotal710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.5(*AdbEntry 5)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link.Counter*AdbTxFrames1M710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.6(*AdbEntry 6)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 1Mbps.Counter*AdbTxFrames2M710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.7(*AdbEntry 7)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 2Mbps.Counter
Appendix B B-27BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual*AdbTxFrames3M710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.8(*AdbEntry 8)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames (excluding retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 3Mbps.Counter*AdbRTxTotal710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.9(*AdbEntry 9)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link.Counter*AdbRTx1M710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.10(*AdbEntry 10)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 1Mbps.Counter*AdbRTx2M710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.11(*AdbEntry 11)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 2Mbps.Counter*AdbRTx3M710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.12(*AdbEntry 12)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 3Mbps.Counter*AdbTxDroppedFrames710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.13(*AdbEntry 13)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames intended to the SU that were dropped because they were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged.Counter*AdbRxFramesTotal710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.14(*AdbEntry 14)Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the total number of frames that were received from the SU over the wireless link.Counter*AdbCirTx710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.16(*AdbEntry 16)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the CIR: SU to AU parameter.Integer0-2200(Kbps)*AdbMirTx710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.17(*AdbEntry 17)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR: SU to AU parameter.Integer32-2200(Kbps)*AdbCirRx710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.18(*AdbEntry 18)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the CIR: AU to SU parameter.Integer0-2200(Kbps)*AdbMirRx710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.194(*AdbEntry 19)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR: AU to SU parameter.Integer32-2200 (Kbps)*AdbCirMaxDelay710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.20(*AdbEntry 20)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value configured in the applicable SU for *MaxDelay parameter.Integer*AdbStatus710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.21(*AdbEntry 21)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The status of the relevant SU. Integerassociated (1)authenticated (2)notAuthenticated 3)*AdbSwVersion710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.22(*AdbEntry 22)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The SW version of the relevant SU. DisplayString*AdbRssi710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.23(*AdbEntry 23)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The average received signal level based on frames received by the AU from the relevant SU, in RSSI units.Integer*AdbDbm710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.244(*AdbEntry 24)Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The average received signal level based on frames received by the AU from the relevant SU, in dBm units.DisplayString
B-28 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Special Operations ParametersNote: Additional Special Operations parameters are reserved for factory use only.MIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis)Description Values/Range*SpecialOp710.3.3. 9 (brzAccessMib 9)*RadioBand710.3.3. 9.1 (*SpecialOp 3)Applicable to AU and SU. Read-only. Identifies the product family/band: DisplayString (SIZE(15))(2.4 (BreezeACCESS II), MMDS, 2.6a, 2.6b, 3.3a, 3.5a, 3.5a1, 3.5b, 3.5ab, 3.6b, 3.8, 5.7(SD), 5.7 (D,D))
Appendix B B-29BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualUnit Control ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*UnitControl710.3.3. 10 (brzAccessMib 10)*ResetUnit710.3.3. 10.1 (*UnitControl 1)Applicable to all products. Resets the unit and applies new parameter values.Integercancel (0)resetSystemNow (1)*SetDefaults710.3.3. 10.2 (*UnitControl 2)Applicable to all products. Sets unit configuration to Defaults values after the next reset.completeFactory: All parameters revert to Factory Defaults valuespartialFactory: All parameters revert to Factory Defaults values, except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity.completeOperator: All parameters revert to Operator Defaults valuespartialOperator: All parameters revert to Operator Defaults values, except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity.Integercancel (0)completeFactory (1)partialFactory (2)completeOperator (1)partialOperator (2)*UnitName710.3.3. 10.3 (*UnitControl 3)Applicable to all products. The unit name. DisplayString (SIZE(32))A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters.*FlashMemoryControl 710.3.3. 10.4 (*UnitControl 4)Applicable to all products. Reset And Boot From Shadow Version: Activates the backup version. Use Current Version After Reset : The currently active version is activated after reset.IntegerCancel (0)resetAndBootFromShadowVersion (1)useCurrentVersionAfterReset (2)*ConsoleSpeed710.3.3. 10.5 (*UnitControl 5)Applicable to all products. The communication speed of the Monitor port.Integers9600bps (1)s19200bps (2)s38400bps (3)s57600bps (4)s115200bps (5)*MonitorLogoutTimer710.3.3. 10.6 (*UnitControl 6)Applicable to all products. Time-out of management programs (Monitor, Telnet).Automatic exit if the program is inactive for the defined time.Integer1-999 (minutes) *UnitPasswords710.3.3. 10.7 (*UnitControl 7)*ReadOnlyPassword710.3.3. 10.7.1 (*UnitPasswords 1)Applicable to all products. The User (read only) password. DisplayString (SIZE(8)).Up to 8 printable ASCII characters.*InstallerPassword 710.3.3. 10.7.2 (*UnitPasswords 2)Applicable to all products. The Installer password. DisplayString (SIZE(8)).Up to 8 printable ASCII characters.*AdminPassword 710.3.3. 10.7.3 (*UnitPasswords 3)Applicable to all products. The Administrator password. This is also the SNMP Write Community String.DisplayString (SIZE(8)).Up to 8 printable ASCII characters.*EventLog710.3.3. 10.10 (*UnitControl 10)Applicable to all products. Event Log parameters
B-30 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01IP Parameters*EventLogPolicy710.3.3. 10.10.1(*EventLog 1)Applicable to all products. Determines which events will be stored in the Event Log. Event from the configured level and higher are stored and can be displayed using the Monitor or by getting a the log file using TFTP.IntegerlogAll (1)message (2)warning (3)error (4) fatal (5)logNone (6) *NumberOfEventsInLogFile710.3.3. 10.10.2(*EventLog 2)Applicable to all products. Read-only. The number of events in the Event Log file.Integer*EraseEventLog710.3.3. 10.10.3(*EventLog 3)Applicable to all products. Deletes all entries from the Event Log file. Integercancel (0)erase (1) *SaveCurrentConfigurationAsOperatorDefaults710.3.3. 10.12 (*UnitControl 12)Applicable to all products. Saves the current configuration as Operator Defaults.Integercancel (0)saveAsDefaults (1)*ExitMonitorOrTelnet710.3.3. 10.13 (*UnitControl 13)Applicable to all products. Exit the monitor program. IntegercancelOperation (0)exit (1)MIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*IpParams 710.3.3. 11 (brzAccessMib 11)*UnitIpAddress710.3.3. 11.1 (*IpParams 1)Applicable to all products. IP address of the unit. IP address *SubNetMask 710.3.3. 11.2 (*IpParams 2)Applicable to all products. Subnet mask of the unit. IP address*DefaultGWAddress710.3.3. 11.3 (*IpParams 3)Applicable to all products. Default gateway IP address of the unit. IP address*UseDhcp710.3.3. 11.4(*IpParams 4)Applicable to all products. DHCP client mode of operation.disabled: Use regular (manual) methods to configure IP parameters.dHCP Only: Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters.automatic: Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters. If a DHCP server is not available, use configured values for *UnitIpAddress, *SubNetMask and *DefaultGWAddress.Integerdisable (0)dHCPOnly (1)automatic (2)*RunIPaddr710.3.3. 11.5 (*IpParams 5)Applicable to all products. Read-only: The run-time IP address. If DHCP is used the Run Time IP Address is the address given to the unit by the server. Otherwise it is the manualy configured address.IP address*RunSubNetMask710.3.3. 11.6 (*IpParams 6)Applicable to all products. Read-only: The run-time Subnet Mask. If DHCP is used the Run Time Subnet Mask is the mask given to the unit by the server. Otherwise it is the manualy configured mask.IP address *RunDefaultIPGateway710.3.3. 11.7 (*IpParams 7)Applicable to all products. Read-only: The run-time Gateway IP address. If DHCP is used the Run Time Gateway IP Address is the address given to the unit by the server. Otherwise it is the manualy configured address.IP address*AccessToDHCP710.3.3. 11.8(*IpParams 8)Applicable to all products. The port to be used for communicating with a DHCP server. (In GU only the fromEthernetOnly option is available).IntegerfromWlanOnly(0)fromEthernetOnly(1)fromBoth(2)
Appendix B B-31BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualSystem Information ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*SysInfo 710.3.3. 13 (brzAccessMib 13)*UnitHwVersion 710.3.3. 13.1 (*SysInfo 1)Applicable to all products. Read-only: Hardware platform version. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*VoiceHwVersion710.3.3. 13.2 (*SysInfo 2)Applicable only to SU with voice. Read-only: Voice hardware platform version. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*SoftwareVersion 710.3.3. 13.3 (*SysInfo 3)Applicable to all products. Read-only: Running software version. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*ShadowVersion710.3.3. 13.4 (*SysInfo 4)Applicable to all products. Read-only: Shadow software version. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*SupportedMibVersion710.3.3. 13.5 (*SysInfo 5)Applicable to all products. Read-only: The supported private MIB versions. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*UnitMacAddress 710.3.3. 13.6 (*SysInfo 6)Applicable to all products. Read-only, Unit hardware MAC address. MAC address*UnitType 710.3.3. 13.7(*SysInfo 7)Applicable to all products. Read-only: Unit type. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*AssociatedAU 710.3.3. 13.8(*SysInfo 8)Applicable to SU only.Read-only: Associated AU MAC address. MAC address *NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset 710.3.3. 13.9(*SysInfo 9)Applicable to AU and SU.Read-only: The number of associations since last reset, including duplicate associations (re-associations).Integer*FlashType 710.3.3. 13.10(*SysInfo 10)Applicable to all products. Read-only: Flash memory type.Type S - Strata Flash.Type F – all other Flash types.DisplayString (SIZE(0..31))*FlashSize 710.3.3. 13.11(*SysInfo 11)Applicable to all products. Read-only: Flash size in Mb. Integer*SwVersionAfterReset710.3.3. 13.12(*SysInfo 12)Applicable to all products. Read-only: The software version to be used after next reset. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))*MaxPowerOutput710.3.3. 13.13(*SysInfo 13)Applicable to SU and AU.Read-only: The maximum output power to the antenna port.Integerna (255)*FrequencyDuplex710.3.3. 13.14(*SysInfo 14)Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS XL family only.Read-only: The frequency separation between uplink and downlink.Integer*UnitStatus710.3.3. 13.15(*SysInfo 15)Applicable to GU only. The status of the GPS antenna. DisplayString (SIZE(0..100))*CurrentNumOfAssociations710.3.3. 13.16(*SysInfo 16)Applicable to AU only. Read-only. The number of subscriber units currently associated with the AU.Integer
B-32 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Alarms ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range*Alarms 710.3.3. 20 (brzAccessMib 20)Alarms parameters*GpsAlarms710.3.3. 20.1(*Alarms 1)Applicable to GU only. GPS Alarms parameters.*AlarmInTable710.3.3. 20.1.1(*GpsAlarms 1)Applicable to GU only. Names and status of Alarms-In. Not accessible.*AlarmInTableEntry710.3.3. 20.1.1.1(*AlarmInTable 1)Applicable to GU only. An Alarms In table entry. Not accessible.*AlarmInIdx710.3.3. 20.1.1.1.1(*AlarmInTableEntry 1)Applicable to GU only. Read-only. Alarms In table index Integer1-10*AlarmInName710.3.3. 20.1.1.1.2(*AlarmInTableEntry 2)Applicable to GU only. Alarm In name. Alarms 1 to 4 can receive a name. The other are read-only. DisplayString (SIZE(0..31))*AlarmInStatus710.3.3. 20.1.1.1.3(*AlarmInTableEntry 3)Applicable to GU only. Read-only. The status (off or on) of Alarm In entry. Integer off (0)on (1)na (255)*AlarmOutTable710.3.3. 20.1.2(*GpsAlarms 2)Applicable to GU only. Names, definition, control and status of Alarms-Out. Not accessible.*AlarmOutTableEntry710.3.3. 20.1.2.1(*AlarmOutTable 1)Applicable to GU only. An Alarms Out table entry. Not accessible.*AlarmOutIdx710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.1(*AlarmOutTableEntry 1)Applicable to GU only. Read-only. Alarms Out table index Integer1-3*AlarmOutName710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.2(*AlarmOutTableEntry 2)Applicable to GU only. Alarm Out name. The other are read-only. DisplayString (SIZE(0..31))*AlarmOutDefinition710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.3(*AlarmOutTableEntry 3)Applicable to GU only. Enter an Alarm-In number to activate the Alarm-Out when this Alarm-In is ON. Enter A to activate the Alarm-Out if ANY of the Alarms-In are ON. Enter N for NONE (never activate the Alarm Out).DisplayString (SIZE(0..2))1-10, A, N*AlarmOutControl710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.4(*AlarmOutTableEntry 4)Applicable to GU only. Alarm out control:off (0) – turn alarm off.on (1) – turn alarm on.auto (2)-activate according to status of relevant alarm-in in accordance with Alarm Out Definition.Integeroff (0)on (1)auto (2)na (255)*AlarmOutStatus710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.5(*AlarmOutTableEntry 5)Applicable to GU only. Read-only. The status (off or on) of Alarm Out entry. Integer off (0)on (1)na (255)
Appendix B B-33BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualbrzPhoneMIB (applicable to SU with voice only)breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER =1.3.6.1.4.1.710{(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) breezecom(710)} breezecomPrvRev OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3{breezecom 3}brzPhoneMib OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3.4{breezecomPrvRev 4 }Note: * is used instead of the phon prefixDialing ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values*DialingParams 710.3.4.1(brzPhonMib 1)*PulseDialing710.3.4.1.1 (*DialingParams 1)Enables/disables automatic pulse dialing detection. Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*GateKeeperOption 710.3.4.1.2 (*DialingParams 2)Enables/disables communicating with the Gatekeeper for call management purposes.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*GkGwIpAddress710.3.4.1.3 (*DialingParams 3)IP Address of the Gateway/GatekeeperThe parameters must be specified if the [*GateKeeperOption] is enabled.IP address*MyTelephoneNumber 710.3.4.1.4 (*DialingParams 4)The telephone number as specified in the Gateway, if [*GateKeeperOption] is disabled. If the [*GateKeeperOption] is enabled the number is transmitted to the Gatekeeper.DisplayString (SIZE (0..10))Up to 10 characters.0 means no number*H323TerminalID 710.3.4.1.5 (*DialingParams 5)The H323 Terminal ID (name) to be used for calling the unit if the feature is enabled.Applicable only if the [*GateKeeperOption] is enabled.DisplayString (SIZE (0..25))Up to 24 characters.X=NoID *IpDialingOption 710.3.4.1.8 (*DialingParams 8)Enables/disables dialing using IP addresses. Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*IpDialingIndicator 710.3.4.1.9 (*DialingParams 9)Specifies the prefix used to identify an IP dialing string. DisplayString (SIZE (0..15))Up to three telephone pad digits (0-9, A-D, *, #). X means no IP Dialing Indicator*AutomaticPrefix710.3.4.1.10(*DialingParams 10)Specifies a default prefix (number of Gateway trunk) to be automatically inserted before the dialed number.DisplayString (SIZE (0..15))Up to eight telephone pad digits (0-9, A-D, *, #).X means no Automatic Prefix.
B-34 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*FastStart710.3.4.1.13 (*DialingParams 13)Enables/disables the fast connect protocol. Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*InformTransferCap710.3.4.1.14 (*DialingParams 14)Defines the value of the information transfer capability in the SETUP message.Integerspeech (0)unrestricted (1)restricted (2)audio (3)unrestrictedTones (4)video (5)na (255)*DTMFRelay710.3.4.1.15 (*DialingParams 15)Disable/enable DTMF Relay.0 ñ Disable. DTMF is transferred in-band. 1 ñ Enable. In-band DTMF is filtered. DTMF is relayed via H.245 session.In case of 'Fast Start' H.245 session will be forced upon DTMF detection.2 - Enable Proprietary. In-band DTMF is filtered. In case of 'Fast Start' DTMF is relayed via Q.931 session. Otherwise DTMF is relayed via H.245 session.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)enableProprietary (2)na (255)*DialingPrfxOption710.3.4.1.16 ((*DialingParams 16)Defines the Dialing Prefix Option for handling prefixes according to the dialing plan supported by the unit. disable (0): Insert Automatic Prefix (if defined). Otherwise forward as dialed.enable (1): Insert Automatic Prefix (if defined) only if first digit differs from *InterRegionalPrfx. Otherwise forward as dialed.enableBlockInter-RegionalPrfx (2): Insert Automatic Prefix (if defined) only if first digit differs from *InterRegionalPrfx. Remove the first digit if it equals *InterRegionalPrfx and the second digit differs from *InterNationalPrfx. Otherwise forward as dialed.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)enableBlockInter-RegionalPrfx (2)na (255)*InterRegionalPrfx710.3.4.1.17 (*DialingParams 17)To define the Inter Regional prefix to be handled according to the dialing plan supported by the unit.DisplayString (SIZE (0..1))One phone keypad digit (0-9, A-D, *, #) or X. X means no Inter Regional Prefix is defined*InterNationalPrfx710.3.4.1.18 (*DialingParams 18)To define the International prefix to be handled according to the dialing plan supported by the unit.DisplayString (SIZE (0..1))One phone keypad digit (0-9, A-D, *, #) or X. X means no International Prefix is defined.*RegistrationTTL710.3.4.1.19 (*DialingParams 19)To define the registration Time To Live. (timeToLive request in the RRQ message to the Gatekeeper).Integer0 ñ 65535 *EndpointType710.3.4.1.20(*DialingParams 20)To define the EndpointType components in H.323 messages for interoperability with other equipment using H.323.Integerterminal (1)gateway (2)na (255)*FaxRelay710.3.4.1.21 (*DialingParams 21)Disable/enable T.38 fax relay Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*FaxRelayRedundancy710.3.4.1.22 (*DialingParams 22)Defines redundancy used for transmitting IFP messages Integer0-5na (255)*BatteryPolarity710.3.4.1.23(*DialingParams 23)To define the battery polarity for supporting an external device, e.g. for coins or tokens charging purpose. This feature is only available in units with voice card from revision D and up.Integerforward (1)reverse (2)forwardToReverse (3)reverseToForward (4)na (255)
Appendix B B-35BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualVoice Parameters*AlternateGkOption710.3.4.1.24(*DialingParams 24)Setting the Alternate Gatekeeper feature.EnableManualDiscovery: the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is specified by the Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address parameter.EnableAutomaticDiscovery: the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is received from the Primary GK.Integerdisable (0)enableManualDiscovery (1)enableAutomaticDiscovery (2)na (255)*AlternateGkIPAddress710.3.4.1.25(*DialingParams 25)To set the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address when Alternate Gatekeeper Option is set to enableManualDiscovery.IP Address*CallerID710.3.4.1.26 (*DialingParams 26)To defines whether the unit will support generation of Caller ID (CID) signaling and if CID is supported, which standard will be used.disable (0): No CID signallingetsiDtAs (1): CID signalling in accordance with ETSI 300-659-1, using Dual Tone Alerting SignaletsiRpAs (2): CID signalling in accordance with ETSI 300-659-1, using Ringing Pulse Alerting SignaletsiRinging (4): CID signalling in accordance with ETSI 300-659-1, transmitting data during the first long silence between two ring patterns.bellcoreMdmf (5): CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202, using Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF) which includes a name field in addition to the date, time and number.bellcoreSdmf (6): CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202, using Single Data Message Format (SDMF) which includes the date, time and number.Integerdisable (0)etsi3006591DtAs (1) etsi3006591RpAs (2)etsi3006591Ringing (4) bellcore202Mdmf (5)bellcore202Sdmf (6)na (255) *StopDialingIndicator710.3.4.1.27 (*DialingParams 28)To enable/disable the use of the # sign to indicate end of dialingdisable: The # sign is interpreted as a part of the dialed sequence. End of dialing is determined by the *StopDialingTimeOut parameter. enable: The # sign is interpreted as indicating end of dialing sequence.Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)*StopDialingTimeOut710.3.4.1.28 (*DialingParams 28)To define the inactivity time following the last dialed digit that will be identified by the unit as an indication to end of dialing.Integer3 – 60 (seconds)na (255) MIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values*VoiceParams 710.3.4.2 (brzPhonMib 2)*VoiceVolume 710.3.4.2.1 (*VoiceParams 1)Gain of signal to earphone. Integer0-20 (-dB)na (255)*EchoCancellation 710.3.4.2.3 (*VoiceParams 3)Enables or disables the echo cancellation feature. Integerdisable (0)enable (1)na (255)
B-36 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*VoiceCodec 710.3.4.2.4 (*VoiceParams 4)The relative priority of voice codecs. DisplayString (SIZE (0..120))A priorities vector of up to 7 different numbers in the range 1-7, where1=G.723.12=G.7293=G.711 uLaw 64k4=G.711 Alaw 64k5=G.729AnnexA6= G.729wAnnexB7= G.729AnnexAwAnnexB *VoiceActivityDetection710.3.4.2.5 (*VoiceParams 5)Enables or disables the voice activity detection (VAD) feature when using G7231 codec.off (0)g7231 (1) na (255)*CompressionEfficiency 710.3.4.2.6 (*VoiceParams 6)Compression Efficiency parameters*G723FramesPerPacket710.3.4.2.6.1(*CompressionEfficiency 1)Number of G723.1 voice frames in an RTP packet. Integer1-8na (255)*G729FramesPerPacket710.3.4.2.6.2(*CompressionEfficiency 2)Number of G729A voice frames in an RTP packet. Integer1-8na (255)*G711uFramesPerPacket710.3.4.2.6.3(*CompressionEfficiency 3)Number of G11 u-Law voice frames in an RTP packet. Integer1-16na (255)*G711aFramesPerPacket710.3.4.2.6.4(*CompressionEfficiency 4)Number of G11 A-Law voice frames in an RTP packet. Integer1-16na (255)
Appendix B B-37BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualTelephony SignalsMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values*TelephonySignals 710.3.4.3(brzPhonMib 3)*TelephonyCountryStandard710.3.4.3.1 (*TelephonySignals 1)The country standard for call progress tones, ringer and timeouts. INTEGERproprietary (1)germany (2)sweden (3)france (4)unitedKingdom (5)belgium (6)usa (7)chile (8)na (255)*TonesTable710.3.4.3.2 (*TelephonySignals 2)A table of parameters of the tones. If the *TelephonyCountryStandard is set to proprietary, the tones parameters may be configured (read/write). For all other country standards, the values are read-only. Not accessible. *TonesEntry710.3.4.3.2.1 (**TonesTable 1)A table entry in the Tones Table. Not accessible.*TonesIdx710.3.4.3.2.1.1(*TonesEntry 1)An index to the Tones Table indicating the tone type. Read-only. Integer1-8*ToneName710.3.4.3.2.1.2(*TonesEntry 2)The name of the tone. IntegerDial Tone(1)Ring Back Tone (2)Busy Tone (3)Congestion Tone (4)Call In Process Tone (5)Ring Frequency (6)Error Tone (7)High Level Error Tone (8)*Freq1710.3.4.3.2.1.3(*TonesEntry 3)One of the two frequencies that can be used for generating the tone. Serves as the Ringer Frequency for Tone 6 (Ring Frequency).If set to 0 – this frequency is not used. Integer0-3000 (Hz) If Ring Frequency (Tone 6), valid values are 17, 20, 25, 50 (Hz).*Freq2710.3.4.3.2.1.4(*TonesEntry 4)The second frequency that can be used for generating the tone. Not Applicable for Ring Frequency (Tone 6)If set to 0 – this frequency is not used. Integer0-3000 (Hz).na (255)*Level1710.3.4.3.2.1.5(*TonesEntry 5)The level in dBm of the first frequency (*Freq1).Not Applicable for Ring Frequency (Tone 6)Display String -31 to 3 (dBm). ñ32 is for mute.*Level2710.3.4.3.2.1.6(*TonesEntry 6)The level in dBm of the second frequency (*Freq2).Not Applicable for Ring Frequency (Tone 6)Display String -31 to 3 (dBm). ñ32 is for mute.*CadenceOn710.3.4.3.2.1.7(*TonesEntry 7)the ringing time (on) in the tones/silence sequence of the tone. Integer100–10,000 (milliseconds) *CadenceOff710.3.4.3.2.1.8(*TonesEntry 8)the silence time (off) in the tones/silence sequence of the tone. Integer100–10,000 (milliseconds) *Duration710.3.4.3.2.1.9(*TonesEntry 9)the maximum duration of transmitting the tone to the earphone. Tone generation will cease upon hang-up (upon off-hook for Tone 6 - Ring Frequency).Integer0-10,000 (seconds)(0 means that the tone is not used).
B-38 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01*TimeOuts710.3.4.3.3 (*TelephonySignals 3)Time Out parameters. If the *TelephonyCountryStandard is set to proprietary, the Time Out parameters may be configured (read/write). For all other country standards, the values are read-only.*MinimumFlashDetectTimeOut710.3.4.3.3.1(*TimeOuts 1)The minimum on-hook time for identifying it as a Hook Flash. Integer0-2,000 (milliseconds)*MaximumFlashDetectTimeOut710.3.4.3.3.2(*TimeOuts 2)The maximum on-hook time for identifying it as a Hook Flash. Integer0-2,000 (milliseconds)*DisconnectTimeOut710.3.4.3.3.3(*TimeOuts 3)The minimum time for decision on an on-hook (disconnect) condition. Integer0-2,000 (milliseconds)*InterDigitTimeOut710.3.4.3.3.4(*TimeOuts 4)Applicable only for pulse dialing. The minimum time between two consecutive pulses to be considered as separating between two digits.Integer0-2,000 (milliseconds)*CalledPartyReleaseTimeOut710.3.4.3.3.5(*TimeOuts 5)The minimum time for an on-hook signal on the called party side to be considered as call disconnect.Integer0-10,000 (milliseconds)
Appendix B B-39BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualSupported TrapsNote: * is used instead of the brzacc prefixTrap Associated ParametersMIB Parameter(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values*Traps 710.3.3.14(brzAccessMib 14)*TrapSUMacAddr 710.3.3.14.1(*Traps 1)Applicable to AU only. SU MAC address. MAC address*TrapRssiQuality 710.3.3.14.2(*Traps 2)Applicable to SU only. RSSI level of the received signal. Integer*TrapLastRssiQuality 710.3.3.14.3(*Traps 3)Applicable to SU only. RSSI level of the received signal from the last AU with which the SU was associated. Integer*TrapText 710.3.3.14.4(*Traps 4)Textual string for future use. DisplayString*TrapToggle 710.3.3.14.5(*Traps 5)An On/Off toggle status, indicating a change in status from off to on or vice versa. Integeron (1)off (2)*LastAUMacAddress 710.3.3.14.6(*Traps 6)Applicable to SU only.The MAC address of the last AU with which the SU was associated.MAC address*TrapLog 710.3.3.14.7(*Traps 7)Login or logout to the monitor program via the Monitor port or Telnet. IntegermonitorLogin (1)monitorLogout(2)telnetLogin (3)telnetLogout (4)*TrapParameterChanged 710.3.3.14.8(*Traps 8)A modification to one of the parameters related to CIR/MIR, IP Filtering, Accounting (Billing) or VLAN . IntegercirOrMir (1)ipFilter (2)billing (3)vlan (4)*TrapAccessRights 710.3.3.14.9(*Traps 9)The access rights used for login. IntegernotLoggedIn (0)readOnly (1)installer (2)administrator (3)factory (4) *TrapTelnetUserIpAddress 710.3.3.14.11(*Traps 11)The IP address of a Telnet user. IP address*TrapAlarmNumber710.3.3.14.12(*Traps 12)Applicable to GU only. The number of the alarm whose status has been changed. Integer1-10*TrapAlarmName710.3.3.14.13(*Traps 13)Applicable to GU only. The Name of the alarm whose status has been changed. DisplayString*TrapRTx710.3.3.14.14(*Traps 14)Applicable to AU only. Retransmissions as a percentage of total transmissions. Integer0-100
B-40 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01TrapsTrap (Number) Description Variables*SUassociatedAUTRAP(2) An AU trap indicating a new association with an SU. *TrapSUMacAddr*AUdisassociatedTRAP(3) An AU trap indicating that an SU has been disassociated from the AU. The AU decides that an SU has been disassociated from it and remove it from the ADB after receiving from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address. The SNAP frame indicating a network topology change where the SU has associated with another AU will be received if both AUs are connected to the same Ethernet backbone.*TrapSUMacAddr*AUagingTRAP (4) An AU trap indicating that an SU was aged out and removed from the ADB following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it.*TrapSUMacAddr*SUassociatedTRAP (6) An SU trap indicating association with an AU. In addition to the MAC address information of the AU, the trap also includes information on the average RSSI of frames received from the AU. *AssociatedAU*LastAUMacAddress*TrapRssiQuality*TrapLastRssiQuality*SUWirelessQualityTRAP(7) An SU trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless link has changed and dropped below (On) or has improved above (Off), defined by the *WirelessTrapThreshold.The threshold is in RSSI units. *TrapToggle*UnitMacAddress*TrapRssiQuality*AUWirelessQualityTRAP(20) An AU trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless link with a specific SU has changed and dropped below (On) or has improved above (Off) a threshold defined by *WirelessTrapThreshold. The threshold is a percents (retransmissions as percentage of total transmissions).*TrapToggle*TrapRTx*PowerUpFromReset (101) A trap indicating power up after Reset. *UnitMacAddr*MonitorStatusTRAP (102) A trap indicating that a log-in or log-out has been performed via the Monitor port or Telnet. Includes the log-in access right and the IP address of the PC performing Telnet (if access is via Monitor the address is 0)*TrapLog*TrapAccessRights*TrapTelnetUserIpAddress *ParameterChangedTRAP(103) An AU or SU trap indicating a change in a CIR/MIR, IP Filter, Accounting or VLAN parameter.*TrapParameterChanged*GpsAlarmInTRAP (104) A GU trap indicating a change in alarm-in status *brzaccTrapToggle*AlarmName*AlarmNumber*GpsAlarmOutTRAP (105) A GU trap indicating a change in alarm-out status *brzaccTrapToggle*AlarmName*AlarmNumber*GpsUTCstatusTRAP (106) A GU trap indicating a change in UTC status. On status is when the GU module receives UTC information from the GPS antenna. This information is useful only if the GU receives also PPS signals from the GPS antenna, indicated by an on status of Alarm In 5 (GPS Antenna Alarm).*TrapToggle
Appendix B B-41BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
B-42 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01
Appendix C:RSSI to dBmConversion Table RSSI dBM RSSI dBM71 -100 114 -6472 -99 115 -6374 -98 116 -6275 -97 118 -6177 -96 119 -6078 -95 120 -5981 -94 121 -5882 -93 122 -5783 -92 123 -5684 -91 125 -5585 -90 126 -5486 -89 127 -5388 -88 128 -5289 -87 129 -5190 -86 130 -5091 -85 131 -4992 -84 133 -4893 -83 134 -4794 -82 135 -4696 -81 136 -4597 -80 137 -4498 -79 138 -4399 -78 139 -42100 -77 141 -41101 -76 142 -40102 -75 143 -39103 -74 144 -38104 -73 145 -37105 -72 146 -36106 -71 148 -35107 -70 149 -34108 -69 150 -33110 -68 151 -32111 -67 152 -31112 -66 153 -30113 -65
C-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01
Appendix D:Parameters ListUnit Control ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedChange Unit Name All Up to 32 printable ASCII charactersEmpty String YesChange Read-only PasswordAll Up to 8 printable ASCII characterspublic Yes – For access from Monitor or Telnet onlyChange Installer PasswordAll Up to 8 printable ASCII charactersuser Yes – For access from Monitor or Telnet onlyChange Administrator PasswordAll Up to 8 printable ASCII charactersprivate Yes – For access from Monitor or Telnet onlyConsole Speed All 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 1152009600 NoLog Out Timer All 1-999 minutes 5 YesEvent Log Policy All Log All (TRC) Level, Message (MSG) Level, Warning (WRN) Level,Error (ERR) Level,Fatal (FTL) Level, Log NoneFatal (FTL) Level Yes
D-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Site Survey ParametersIP ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedRSSI Display OptionAU, SU RSSI, dBm RSSI YesParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedIP Address All IP address 10.0.0.1 NoSubnet Mask All IP address 255.0.0.0 NoDefault Gateway AddressAll IP address 0.0.0.0 NoDHCP Option All Disable, DHCP Only,AutomaticDisable NoAccess to DHCP AU, SU From Wlan Only,From Ethernet Only,From Both Ethernet & WlanAU: From Ethernet OnlySU: From Wlan OnlyNo
Appendix D D-3BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualAir Interface ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedESSID AU, SU Up to 31 printable ASCII charactersESSID1 NoOperator ESSID OptionAU Disable, Enable Enable NoOperator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII charactersESSID1 NoHopping Sequence AU Depends on hopping standard 1 NoHopping Set AU 1-3 1 NoHopping Sync AU Idle, Master, Slave Idle NoBest AU Support SU Disable, Enable Disable NoNumber of Scanning AttemptsSU 1 – 255 20 YesPreferred AU MAC AddressSU MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 (no preferred AU)YesTransmit Power ControlAU-A/E, SU-A/E (IF based units)0 – 15 15 YesPower Level SU-R, SU-I/AU-I Low, High High NoTransmit Antenna SU-RSU-I/AU-I Use Two Antennas,Use Antenna No. 1,Use Antenna No. 2Use Antenna Number 1NoReceive Attenuation ControlSU-A/E (IF based units)0, 10dB, 25dB 0 NoMaximum Data RateAU, SU 1, 2 and 3Mbps 3Mbps NoAcknowledge Delay LimitAU, SU Low, Medium, High Low NoMaximum Number of AssociationsAU 1 – 512 512 YesCall Aging Time AU 1 (no aging), 2-50,000 (seconds) 1800 seconds NoMaximum Voice SessionsAU 0 – 50 12 YesACSE Option AU and GU Disable, Enable Disable NoACSE Maximum Voice SessionsAU 0 – 21 21 Yes
D-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For DataAU, SU 0 – 100 6 NoACSE Number Of Retransmissions For VoiceAU, SU with voice0 – 100 30 No
Appendix D D-5BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualNetwork Management ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedAccess To Network ManagementAU, SU From Wlan Only,From Ethernet Only,From Both Ethernet & WlanFrom Both Ethernet & WlanNoNetwork Management FilteringAll Disable,Activate Management IP Filter On Ethernet Port,Activate Management IP Filter On Wlan Port (not available in GU),Activate Management IP Filter On Both Ethernet & Wlan Ports (not available in GU),Disable NoSet Network Management IP AddressAll IP address 0.0.0.0 (all 3 entries)YesSend SNMP Traps All Disable Traps Sending,Enable Traps SendingDisable Traps SendingNoSNPM Traps IP DestinationAll IP address 0.0.0.0 (all 3 entries)NoSNMP Traps CommunityAll Up to 14 printable ASCII characters public (all 3 entries)No
D-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Bridge ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedVLAN ID-Data SU 1 – 4094 1 NoVLAN ID – ManagementAU, GU, SU without voice1 – 4094, 65535 65535 (no VLAN) NoVLAN ID – Voice & ManagementSU with voice1 – 4094, 65535 65535 (no VLAN) NoVLAN Link Type AU, SU Hybrid Link,Trunk Link,Access Link (only in SU)Hybrid Link NoVoice Priority Tag Option SU with voiceDisable, Enable Disable NoVLAN Forwarding SupportAU, SU Disable, Enable Disable NoVLAN Forwarding IDAU, SU 1 – 4094 (up to 20 entries) Empty list NoVLAN Relaying SupportAU Disable, Enable Disable NoVLAN Relaying ID AU 1 – 4094 (up to 20 entries) Empty list NoVLAN Priority – DataAU, SU 0 – 7 0 NoVLAN Priority – VoiceSU with voice0 – 7 6 YesVLAN Priority – ManagementAU, SU, GU 0 – 7 SU with voice: 4All other units: 0 NoVLAN Priority ThresholdAU, SU 0 – 7 4 YesVoice Packets ToS SU with voice0 – 255 0 YesToS Precedence ThresholdAU, SU 0 – 7 3 YesFilter Option SU Disable, From Ethernet Only,From Wlan Only,Both From Ethernet & Wlan Disable YesDHCP Broadcast Override FilterSU Disable, Enable Disable YesPPPoE Broadcast Override FilterSU Disable, Enable Disable Yes
Appendix D D-7BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualPerformance ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedARP Broadcast Override FilterSU Disable, Enable Disable YesLAN to WLAN Bridging Mode AU Reject Unknown, Forward UnknownForward Unknown YesBridge Aging Time AU, SU 100 – 2000 seconds AU, SU-BD, SU-BD1V: 300All other SUs: 1800NoBroadcast Relaying AU Disable, Enable Enable NoUnicast Relaying AU Disable, Enable Enable NoParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedRTS Threshold AU, SU 20 – 1600 bytes AU: 1600SU: 60NoNumber of RetransmissionsAU, SU 1 – 100 1 NoNumber of Retransmissions to Decrease RateAU, SU 0 – 10 0 NoNumber of Dwells to RetransmitAU, SU 0 – 9 2 NoMinimum Contention WindowAU, SU 7 - 255 31 NoCarrier Sense Level AU, SU AU-A/E, SU-A/E: in dBmSU-R, SU-I, AU-I : in RSSI units AU-A/E, SU-A/E: -85dBmSU-R, SU-I, AU-I : 50 (RSSI)NoMaximum Multicast RateAU 1, 2, 3Mbps 1Mbps YesMulti-Rate Support AU, SU Disable, Enable Enable NoMulti-Rate Decision Window SizeAU, SU 1 – 50 12 NoNumber of Failures in Multi-Rate Decision WindowAU, SU 1 to Multi-Rate Decision window Size8NoDwell Time AU and GU 32, 64, 128 128 No
D-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Service ParametersSecurity ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedUser Filtering OptionSU Disable,IP Only, User Defined Addresses Only, PPPoE Protocol OnlyDisable YesSet User Filter AddressSU IP address (8 entries) 0.0.0.0 (all 8 entries)YesSet User Filter Mask SU IP address (8 entries) 255.255.255.255 (all 8 entries)YesSet User Filter RangeSU 0 - 255 0 (all 8 entries) YesMIR/CIR Option AU, SU Disable, Enable Disable NoMIR: AU to SU SU 32 – 2200Kbps 128Kbps NoMIR: SU to AU SU 32 – 2200Kbps 128Kbps NoCIR: AU to SU SU 0 – 2200Kbps 64Kbps NoCIR: SU to AU SU 0 – 2200Kbps 64Kbps NoMaximum Burst DurationAU, SU 0 – 2000 milliseconds 5 milliseconds NoMaximum Delay SU 300 – 10,000 milliseconds 5,000 milliseconds NoGraceful Degradation LimitAU 0 – 70 (%) 70 (%) NoMIR Only Option AU Disable, Enable Disable YesParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedAuthentication AlgorithmAU, SU Open System, Shared Key Open System NoDefault Key ID AU, SU 1 – 4 1 YesWEP Key # 1-4 AU, SU 10 Hexadecimal Digits 0000000000 (no key)No
Appendix D D-9BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualVoice ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedVolume SU with voice-20 to 0 (dB) -3dB YesEcho Cancellation SU with voiceDisable, Enable Enable YesVoice Codec SU with voice1 – 7654321 (use only the digits 1 – 7)2134 NoG723 Frames Per PacketSU with voice1 – 8 2 NoG729 Frames Per PacketSU with voice1 – 12 6 NoG711 u-Law Frames Per PacketSU with voice1 – 16 12 NoG729 Frames Per PacketSU with voice1 – 16 12 NoVoice Activity DetectionSU with voiceVoice Activity Detection OFF, Voice Activity Detection G7231Voice Activity Detection OFFNo
D-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Dialing ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedPulse Dialing SU with voiceDisable, Enable Enable NoGatekeeper Option SU with voiceDisable, Enable Disable NoGatekeeper /Gateway IP AddressSU with voiceIP address 0.0.0.0 NoAlternate Gatekeeper OptionSU with voiceDisable, Enable Disable NoAlternate Gatekeeper IP AddressSU with voiceIP address 0.0.0.0 NoTelephone Number SU with voiceUp to 10 decimal digits 0000000000 NoH323 Terminal ID SU with voiceUp to 24 characters X (No terminal ID) NoIP Dialing Option SU with voiceDisable, Enable Enable YesIP Dialing Indicator SU with voiceup to 3 phone key-pad digits(0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)*YesAutomatic Prefix SU with voiceup to 8 phone key-pad digits(0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)X (No prefix) YesFast Start SU with voiceDisable, Enable Enable YesInformation Transfer CapabilitySU with voiceSpeech,Unrestricted,Restricted,3.1KHz audio,Unrestricted with tones,VideoSpeech NoDialing Prefix OptionSU with voiceDisable, Enable, Enable & Block Inter-Regional PrefixDisable YesInter-Regional PrefixSU with voiceOne phone key-pad digit (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) and X (no prefix). 0YesInternational Prefix SU with voiceOne phone key-pad digit (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) and X (no prefix). 0YesRegistration TTL SU with voice0 (not active), 1 – 65535 0 NoDTMF Relay SU with voiceDisable, Enable, Enable ProprietaryEnable No
Appendix D D-11BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedEndpoint Type SU with voiceTerminal, Gateway Terminal NoFax Relay Option SU with voiceDisable, Enable Disable NoFax Relay redundancySU with voice0–5 3 NoBatter Polarity SU with voice(Voice card rev. D and higher)Forward Battery,Reverse Battery,Forward->Reverse Battery,Reverse->Forward BatteryForward Battery NoCaller ID SU with voice(Voice card rev. D and higher)Disable, ETSI 300659-1 DT-AS,ETSI 300659-1 RP-AS,ETSI 300659-1 Ringing,Bellcore 202 MDMF,B e l l c o re 20 2 S DM F Disable YesStop dialing TimeoutSU with voice3 – 60 seconds 5 seconds YesStop Dialing IndicatorSU with voiceDisable, Enable Disable Yes
D-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Telephony SignalsParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedTelephony Country StandardSU with voiceProprietary, Germany, Sweden, France, United Kingdom, Belgium, USA, ChileUSA NoFrequency 1 SU with voice0 – 3000Hz Dial Tone: 350Ring Back: 440Busy: 480Congestion: 480Error: 480High Level Error: 20NoFrequency 1 SU with voice0 – 3000Hz Dial Tone: 350Ring Back: 440Busy: 480Congestion: 480Error: 480High Level Error: 0Ring Frequency: 20NoLevel 1 SU with voice-32 to +3 (dBm) Dial Tone: -13Ring Back: -19Busy: -14Congestion: -24Error: -24High Level Error: 0Ring Frequency: NullNoLevel 2 SU with voice-32 to +3 (dBm) Dial Tone: -13Ring Back: -19Busy: -14Congestion: -24Error: -24High Level Error: 0Ring Frequency: NullNoCadence On SU with voice100-10,000 milliseconds Dial Tone: Ring Back: 1000Busy: 500Congestion: 1000Error: 200High Level Error: 0Ring Frequency: 1000
Appendix D D-13BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedCadence Off SU with voice100-10,000 milliseconds Dial Tone: Ring Back: 3000Busy: 500Congestion: 1000Error: 200High Level Error: 0Ring Frequency: 3000NoDuration SU with voice0 – 10,000 seconds Dial Tone: 15Ring Back: 60Busy: 15Congestion: 0Error: 0High Level Error: 0Ring Frequency: 60NoMin. Flash Detect TimeoutSU with voice0-2,000 milliseconds 120 NoMax. Flash Detect TimeoutSU with voice0-2,000 milliseconds 1000 NoDisconnect Timeout SU with voice0-2,000 milliseconds 1000 NoInter-Digit Timeout SU with voice0-2,000 milliseconds 100 NoCalled Party Release TimeoutSU with voice0-10,000 milliseconds 0 No
D-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System ManualManual Revision: 1.01Hopping ParametersParameter Unit Range Default Run-Time UpdatedNumber of Hopping FrequenciesGU 2-99 NoSynchronization Signal SourceGU GPS Antenna or Internal,Local (from other GU)GPS Antenna or InternalYesACSE Option AU and GU Disable, Enable Disable NoDwell Time AU and GU 32, 64, 128 128 NoAlarm ParametersAlarm In Names GU Up to 31 printable ASCII charactersAlarm In 1 through Alarm In 4YesAlarm Out Names GU Up to 31 printable ASCII charactersAlarm Out 1 through Alarm Out 3YesAutomatic Alarm Out DefinitionGU 1 -10, N (None), A (Any) N (None) for all 3 Alarm OutsYesAlarm Out Control GU On, Off, Automatic Automatic – for all 3 Alarm OutsYes
IndexAAccess Link Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-46Access to DHCP Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-22Access to Network Management Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-41Access UnitsAU-A/E-NI ...................................................................................Book 1, 2-7Acknowledge Delay Limit Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-38ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data Parameter ...................Book 4, 2-40ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice Parameter .................Book 4, 2-41ACSE Option .....................................................................................Book 4, 2-78ACSE Option Parameter ....................................................................Book 4, 2-40ACSE Parameters Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-40Add Forwarding VLAN ID Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-49Add Frequencies Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-25Add Relaying VLAN ID Parameter ...................................................Book 4, 2-49Advanced Configuration Menu ..........................................................Book 4, 2-21Air Interface Parameters Menu ..........................................................Book 4, 2-22AL In and AL OUT Connectors ........................................................Book 3, 3-2Alarm Parameters Menu ....................................................................Book 4, 2-78Alarms In Names And Status Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-80Alarms In Names Menu .....................................................................Book 4, 2-79Alarms Out Control Menu .................................................................Book 4, 2-80Alarms Out Names Menu ..................................................................Book 4, 2-79Alarms Out Names, Definitions, Control and Status Parameter ........Book 4, 2-81Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-65Alternate Gatekeeper Option Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-65AntennaConnection ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-11ARP Broadcast Override Filter Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-54AU MAC Address Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-4AU-A/E-BSPacking List ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-2AU-A/E-NI .........................................................................................Book 1, 2-7Packing List ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-3AU-NIInstallation ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-12Authentication Algorithm Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-62Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu ...........................................Book 4, 2-79Automatic Prefix Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-66
BBad fragments received Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-14Base Station Equipment .....................................................................Book 1, 2-4Basic Configuration Menu ................................................................. Book 4, 2-10Basic ParametersConfiguring ..................................................................................Book 3, 1-5Battery Polarity Parameter ................................................................. Book 4, 2-69Best AU Parameters in SU Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-35Best AU Selection Parameters ...........................................................Book 4, 2-34Best AU Support Parameter .............................................................. Book 4, 2-35BreezeACCESSIntroduction .................................................................................Book 1, 1-2BreezeCONFIG .................................................................................Book 1, 2-10BreezeMANAGE ...............................................................................Book 1, 2-9Bridge Aging Time Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-54Bridge Parameters ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-43Bridge Parameters Menu ...................................................................Book 4, 2-43Broadcast Relaying Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-54BS-AUInstallation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-17BS-PSInstallation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-14Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-2BS-PS-ACInstallation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-15Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-3BS-SHInstallation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-14Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-2BS-SH-ACPacking List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-2Busy Tone Parameter .........................................................................Book 4, 2-71CCadence Off .......................................................................................Book 4, 2-73Cadence Off Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72Cadence On ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-72Cadence On Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72Call Aging Time Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-38Called Party Release Timeout Parameter ..........................................Book 4, 2-73Carrier Sense Level Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-56Change Password Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-7Change Unit Name Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-7CIR - AU to SU Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-60CIR - SU to AU Parameter ................................................................ Book 4, 2-60CommissioningAL IN and AL OUT Connectors .................................................Book 3, 3-2Aligning SU-A/E Antenna ...........................................................Book 3, 2-3
Configuring Basic Parameters .....................................................Book 3, 1-5GU-A-BS .....................................................................................Book 3, 1-10RSSI and Maximum Data Rate ....................................................Book 3, 2-2Compression Efficiency Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-63ConfiguringBasic Parameters ..........................................................................Book 3, 1-5GU-A-BS units .............................................................................Book 3, 1-10RSSI and Maximum Data Rate ....................................................Book 3, 2-2Congestion Tone Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-71ConnectorsAL IN and AL OUT .....................................................................Book 3, 3-2Console Speed Parameter ...................................................................Book 4, 2-4,Book 4, 2-8Continuous Link Quality Display ......................................................Book 4, 2-17CountersEthernet ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-12Per-Rate ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-19Wireless Link ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-13Current Number of Associations Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-4DDefault Gateway Address Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-21Default Key ID Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-62Defaults Settings Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-6Delete a Network Management IP Address Parameter ......................Book 4, 2-42Delete a User Filtering Entry Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-59Delete All Network Management IP Addresses Parameter ...............Book 4, 2-42Delete All User Filtering Entries Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-59Destination IP Address Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-16DHCP Broadcast Override Filter Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-53DHCP Client Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-22DHCP Options Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-22Dial Tone Parameter ..........................................................................Book 4, 2-71Dialing Parameters Menu ...................................................................Book 4, 2-64Dialing Prefix Option Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-67Dialing Prefix Parameter ....................................................................Book 4, 2-67Disconnect Timeout Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-73Display Association Info Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-18Display Bridging & Association Info ................................................Book 4, 2-17Display Bridging & Association Info Parameter ...............................Book 4, 2-17Display CIR/MIR Info Parameter ......................................................Book 4, 2-19Display Counters Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-15Display Event Log Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-9DTMF Relay Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-68Duplicate frames discarded Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-15Duration .............................................................................................Book 4, 2-73Duration Parameter ............................................................................Book 4, 2-72Dwell Time Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-
58, Book 4,2-78EEcho Cancellation Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-63Endpoint Type Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-69Enhanced Mode Spanning Factor ...................................................... Book 4, 2-27Erase Event Log Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-9Erase Manual Sequence .....................................................................Book 4, 2-26Error Tone Parameter ........................................................................Book 4, 2-71ESSID Parameter ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-33ESSID Parameters .............................................................................Book 4, 2-33Ethernet Broadcast Filtering ..............................................................Book 4, 2-53Ethernet Counters ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-12Event Log Menu Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-8Event Log Policy Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-9FFast Start Parameter ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-66Fax Relay Option Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-69Fax Relay Parameter ..........................................................................Book 4, 2-69Fax Relay Redundancy Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-69Filter Options Parameter ....................................................................Book 4, 2-53Flash Memory Control Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-8Flash Type Parameter ........................................................................ Book 4, 2-3Flash Versions Parameter .................................................................. Book 4, 2-3Flexible Hopping Definition Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-24Frames dropped (too many retries) Parameter ..................................Book 4, 2-13Frequency 1 Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72Frequency 2 Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72GG711A-law Frames Per Packet Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-64G711u-law Frames Per Packet Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-64G723 Frames Per Packet Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-64G729 Frames Per Packet Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-64Gatekeeper Option Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-65GateKeeper/GateWay IP Address Parameter ....................................Book 4, 2-65GPS and Alarms SystemInstallation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-20GPS and Alarms system ....................................................................Book 1, 2-5Graceful Degradation Limit Parameter ............................................. Book 4, 2-61GU-A-BS ...........................................................................................Book 1, 2-5Configuring ..................................................................................Book 3, 1-10Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-20Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-3GU-BSAL IN and AL OUT Connectors .................................................Book 3, 3-2
HH323 Terminal ID Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-65High Level Error Tone Parameter ......................................................Book 4, 2-72Hopping Parameters Menu .................................................................Book 4, 2-77Hopping Shift .....................................................................................Book 4, 2-28Hopping Sync .....................................................................................Book 4, 2-33Hybrid Link Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-48IInfo Screens Menu .............................................................................Book 4, 2-3Information Transfer Capability Parameter .......................................Book 4, 2-66InstallationConnecting the Antenna Cable ....................................................Book 2, 1-11GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System .............................................Book 2, 1-20Indoor Units .................................................................................Book 2, 1-12Modular Base Station Equipment ................................................Book 2, 1-14Outdoor Units ...............................................................................Book 2, 1-7Pole Mounting Outdoor Units ......................................................Book 2, 1-9SU-NI and AU-NI ........................................................................Book 2, 1-12Inter-Digit Timeout Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-73Internally discarded MIR/CIR Parameter ..........................................Book 4, 2-15International Prefix Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-68Inter-Regional Prefix Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-67Introducing BreezeACCESS ..............................................................Book 1, 1-2IP Address Parameter .........................................................................Book 4, 2-21IP Dialing Indicator Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-66IP Dialing Option Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-66IP Parameters Menu ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-21LLAN to Wireless Link Bridging Mode Parameter .............................Book 4, 2-54Level 1 Parameter ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-72Level 2 Parameter ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-72Locating UnitsAU-RA .........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5AU-RE .........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5IF Cable ........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5Indoor Equipment ........................................................................Book 2, 1-6SU-RA ..........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5SU-RE ..........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5Log Out Timer Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-8MMAC Address Database .....................................................................Book 4, 2-17Main Menu .........................................................................................Book 4, 2-2Management Systems ........................................................................Book 1, 2-9BreezeCONFIG ............................................................................Book 1, 2-10BreezeMANAGE .........................................................................Book 1, 2-9
Manual Sequence Definition .............................................................Book 4, 2-26Max. Flash Detect Timeout Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-73Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions Parameter .....................................Book 4, 2-40Maximum Burst Duration Parameter ................................................ Book 4, 2-60Maximum Data RateConfiguring ..................................................................................Book 3, 2-2Maximum Data Rate Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-36Maximum Delay Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-61Maximum Multicast Rate Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-56Maximum Number of Associations Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-38Maximum Voice Sessions Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-39MenusAdvanced Configuration ..............................................................Book 4, 2-21Air Interface Parameters .............................................................. Book 4, 2-22Alarm Parameters ........................................................................ Book 4, 2-78Alarms In Names .........................................................................Book 4, 2-79Alarms Out Control .....................................................................Book 4, 2-80Alarms Out Names ......................................................................Book 4, 2-79Automatic Alarms Out Definition ............................................... Book 4, 2-79Basic Configuration .....................................................................Book 4, 2-10Bridge Parameters ........................................................................Book 4, 2-43Dialing Parameters ......................................................................Book 4, 2-64Ethernet Broadcast Filtering ........................................................Book 4, 2-53Hopping Parameters ....................................................................Book 4, 2-77Info Screens .................................................................................Book 4, 2-3IP Parameters ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-21Main ............................................................................................. Book 4, 2-2Network Management Parameters ...............................................Book 4, 2-41Performance Parameters ..............................................................Book 4, 2-55Security Parameters .....................................................................Book 4, 2-62Service Parameters ......................................................................Book 4, 2-58Show Advanced Parameters ........................................................ Book 4, 2-5Show Alarm Parameters ..............................................................Book 4, 2-80Show All Parameters ...................................................................Book 4, 2-5Show Basic Parameters ............................................................... Book 4, 2-5Show Unit Status .........................................................................Book 4, 2-3Site Survey ...................................................................................Book 4, 2-12Telephony Signals .......................................................................Book 4, 2-71Unit Control .................................................................................Book 4, 2-6Voice Parameters .........................................................................Book 4, 2-63Micro-Cell Access Unit .....................................................................Book 1, 2-7Min. Flash Detect Timeout Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-73Minimum Contention Window Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-56MIR - AU to SU Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-60MIR - SU to AU Parameter ............................................................... Book 4, 2-60MIR and CIR Parameters ..................................................................Book 4, 2-59, Book 4,2-70
MIR/CIR Option Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-60Multi-Rate Decision Window Size Parameter ...................................Book 4, 2-57Multi-Rate Support Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-57NNetwork Management Filtering Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-41Network Management Parameters .....................................................Book 4, 2-41Network Management Parameters Menu ...........................................Book 4, 2-41Networking Equipment ......................................................................Book 1, 2-8No. of Pings Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-16Number of Associations Since Last Reset Parameter ........................Book 4, 2-4Number of Dwells to Retransmit Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-55Number of Failures in Multi-Rate Decision Window Parameter ......Book 4, 2-57Number of Hopping Frequencies Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-77Number of Retransmissions Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-55Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate Parameter ..................Book 4, 2-56Number of Scanning Attempts Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-35OOperator ESSID Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-33Outdoor UnitsBottom Panel ................................................................................Book 2, 1-7Installation ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-7Pole Mounting ..............................................................................Book 2, 1-9PPacking ListsAU-A/E-BS ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-2AU-A/E-NI ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-3BS-PS ...........................................................................................Book 2, 1-2BS-PS-AC ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-3BS-SH ..........................................................................................Book 2, 1-2BS-SH-AC ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-2GU-A-BS .....................................................................................Book 2, 1-3SU-A/E .........................................................................................Book 2, 1-2Per Hop Statistics ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-15Performance Parameters ....................................................................Book 4, 2-55Performance Parameters Menu ..........................................................Book 4, 2-55Per-Rate Counters ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-19, Book 4,2-20Physical Specifications ......................................................................Book 1, 3-6Ping Frame Length Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-16Ping Frame Timeout Parameter .........................................................Book 4, 2-16Ping Test ............................................................................................Book 4, 2-16PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter Parameter .....................................Book 4, 2-53Preferred AU MAC Address Parameter .............................................Book 4, 2-35Pulse Dialing Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-65
RRate Parameter ...................................................................................Book 4, 2-57Receive Attenuation Control Parameter ............................................ Book 4, 2-39Registration TTL Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-68Remove Forwarding VLAN ID Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-49Remove Frequencies Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-25Remove Relaying VLAN ID Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-50Reset Counters Parameter .................................................................. Book 4, 2-15Reset Unit Parameter .........................................................................Book 4, 2-6Ring Frequency Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-72Ring-Back Tone Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-71Ringer Frequency Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-72RSSIConfiguring ..................................................................................Book 3, 2-2RSSI Display Option .........................................................................Book 4, 2-20RTS Threshold Parameter .................................................................Book 4, 2-55SSave Current Configuration As Operator Defaults Parameter ..........Book 4, 2-7Scrambling Definition .......................................................................Book 4, 2-25Scrambling Mode ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-25Security Parameters ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-62Security Parameters Menu .................................................................Book 4, 2-62Send SNMP Traps Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-43Service Parameters ............................................................................Book 4, 2-58Service Parameters Menu ..................................................................Book 4, 2-58Set Factory Defaults Parameter .........................................................Book 4, 2-6Set Full Operator Defaults Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-6Set Network Management IP Addresses Parameter ..........................Book 4, 2-42Set Partial Factory Defaults Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-6Set Partial Operator Defaults Parameter ............................................ Book 4, 2-7Set User Filter Address Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-58Set User Filter Mask Parameter .........................................................Book 4, 2-58Set User Filter Range Parameter .......................................................Book 4, 2-59Show Advanced Parameters Menu ....................................................Book 4, 2-5Show Alarm Parameters Menu .......................................................... Book 4, 2-80Show All Parameters Menu ...............................................................Book 4, 2-5Show All User Filtering Parameters Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-59Show Basic Parameters Menu ...........................................................Book 4, 2-5Show IP Parameters Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-22Show Ping Test Values Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-17Show Unit Status Menu .....................................................................Book 4, 2-3Site Survey Menu ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-12SNMP Traps Community Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-43SNMP Traps IP Destination Parameter .............................................Book 4, 2-43SNMP Traps Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-42Spanning Factor .................................................................................Book 4, 2-27Specifications
AU-A/E-NI ...................................................................................Book 1, 3-7Configuration and Managemen ....................................................Book 1, 3-4Data Communication ...................................................................Book 1, 3-3Environmental ..............................................................................Book 1, 3-5GU-RA GPS Radio ......................................................................Book 1, 3-4GU-RA to BS-GU Communication .............................................Book 1, 3-5IF Indoor Outdoor Communication ............................................Book 1, 3-4Modular Base Station Equipmen .................................................Book 1, 3-8Physical ........................................................................................Book 1, 3-6Radio and Modem ........................................................................Book 1, 3-2Standards Compliance, General ...................................................Book 1, 3-5SU-A/E .........................................................................................Book 1, 3-6Telephony .....................................................................................Book 1, 3-3Voice/Fax .....................................................................................Book 1, 3-3Start Sending Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-17StatisticsPer Hop ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-15Traffic ...........................................................................................Book 4, 2-12Voice ............................................................................................Book 4, 2-15Stop Sending Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-17SU-A/E ...............................................................................................Book 1, 2-2Aligning Antenna .........................................................................Book 3, 2-3Packing List ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-2Subnet Mask Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-21Subscriber Units .................................................................................Book 1, 2-2SU-A/E .........................................................................................Book 1, 2-2SU-NIInstallation ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-12SUs .....................................................................................................Book 1, 2-2Synchronization Signal Source Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-78System Specifications ........................................................................Book 1, 3-2TTelephone Number Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-65Telephony Country Standard Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-71Telephony Signals Menu ...................................................................Book 4, 2-71TestPing ..............................................................................................Book 4, 2-16Timeouts Parameter ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-73ToS Precedence Threshold Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-52ToS Priority Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-52ToS Priority Parameters .....................................................................Book 4, 2-52Total received data frames Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-14Total received frames from wireless Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-14Total received frames via Ethernet Parameter ...................................Book 4, 2-12Total retransmitted frames Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-14Total submitted frames (bridge) Parameter .......................................Book 4, 2-13Total transmitted frames to wireless Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-13
Total Tx errors Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-14Traffic Statistics .................................................................................Book 4, 2-12Transmit Power Control Parameter ................................................... Book 4, 2-36Transmitted wireless to Ethernet Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-12Trunk Link Parameter ........................................................................Book 4, 2-47UUnicast Relaying Parameter .............................................................. Book 4, 2-55Unit Control Menu .............................................................................Book 4, 2-6Unit Hardware Version Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-3Unit MAC Address Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-3Unit Status - GU Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-4Unit Status - SU Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-4Unit Type Parameter ..........................................................................Book 4, 2-3UnitsBase Station Equipment ...............................................................Book 1, 2-4Subscriber ....................................................................................Book 1, 2-2User Filtering Option Parameter ........................................................ Book 4, 2-58User Filtering Parameters ..................................................................Book 4, 2-58VVLAN ................................................................................................Book 4, 2-43VLAN Forwarding Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-48VLAN Forwarding Support Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-49VLAN ID-Data Parameter .................................................................Book 4, 2-44VLAN ID-Management Parameter ...................................................Book 4, 2-44VLAN ID-Voice & Management Parameter .....................................Book 4, 2-45VLAN Link Type Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-46VLAN Parameters .............................................................................Book 4, 2-43VLAN Priority - Data Parameter .......................................................Book 4, 2-51VLAN Priority - Management Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-51VLAN Priority - Voice Parameter ..................................................... Book 4, 2-51VLAN Priority Threshold Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-51VLAN Relaying Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-49VLAN Relaying Support Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-49VLAN Support Parameter .................................................................Book 4, 2-43VLAN Traffic Priority Parameter ...................................................... Book 4, 2-50Voice Activity Detection Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-64Voice Bytes Received Parameter ......................................................Book 4, 2-15Voice Bytes Transmitted Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-15Voice Codec Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-63Voice Frames Received Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-15Voice Frames Transmitted Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-15Voice Hardware Version Parameter .................................................. Book 4, 2-4Voice Packets ToS Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-52Voice Parameters Menu .....................................................................Book 4, 2-63Voice Priority Tag Option Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-48Voice Statistics ..................................................................................Book 4, 2-15
Volume Parameter ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-63WWEP KEY # Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-62Wireless Link Counters ......................................................................Book 4, 2-13WLAN Aging Time Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-38

Navigation menu